JP7332904B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

As a recent pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board (game area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a big hit (special game ) state, and a large winning opening provided on the game board can be opened to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines constructed in this way, there are a probability variable game state for increasing the probability of winning in the big win lottery and a time shortening game state for increasing the efficiency of pattern variation for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery. There is also a gaming machine which has such a game state and creates a game progress state that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, there is a possibility that a malfunction of the gaming machine may cause disadvantages for both the manager of the gaming facility and the players.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-139600 JP 2008-136688 A JP 2006-68291 A

It is desired to provide a pachinko game machine that allows smooth progress of games.

The game machine according to this aspect is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a guide rail for guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area;
a prevention piece provided near the exit of the guide rail for preventing the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning into the guide rail;
A main game start opening provided at a predetermined position of the game board and into which a game ball can enter;
A game ball detection device capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the main game start opening;
a base portion;
It is attached to the base part and has a door part that can be opened and closed,
The base portion has a stepped portion which is a front surface of the base portion and is a region higher than the upper surface of the door portion when viewed from the front,
The game ball placed so as to be in contact with the stepped portion is configured so as not to roll forward when viewed from the front,
The power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted when the game ball is shot by the shooting means and the game ball is moving along the guide rail, and the power is turned off when the game ball is moving along the guide rail. When the supply is resumed and the fired game ball passes through the prevention piece and then passes through the game ball detection device via the main game start port, the game ball is detected by the game ball detection device after the power supply is restarted. The time until detection becomes possible is longer than the time from when the launched game ball passes through the prevention piece to when it passes through the game ball detection device via the main game start port. The game machine is characterized in that
<Appendix>
Other aspects different from this aspect will be listed below, but the present invention can be implemented without being limited to these.
The game machine according to this alternative aspect is
a performance display section capable of displaying an image;
Equipped with an operable production movable object,
When the production movable object executes a predetermined action, it has a timing to be positioned in front of the production display unit,
The movable object for production is
A front surface portion that is visible from the front,
and a back surface part that is invisible from the front,
The effect display unit has a plurality of pixels,
The pixels of the effect display portion are displayed based on RGB gradation values in which each of R corresponding to red, G corresponding to green, and B corresponding to blue is expressed in 256 levels of gradation from 0 to 255. can be displayed in color,
As states related to game progress, at least a playing state in which the game is in progress and a waiting state in which the game is not in progress,
In the standby state, it is configured so that a predetermined standby effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
At a predetermined timing during display of the predetermined standby effect, the value of R is 1 or more, the value of G is 1 or more, and the value of B is 1 or more in the RGB gradation values of all pixels of the effect display portion. is configured to be
A display color with an R value of 0, a G value of 0, and a B value of 0 in the RGB gradation values of the pixels of the effect display area, and the color occupying the largest area among the colors of the reverse display area. is a game machine characterized by having the same color.

According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a game machine that allows the game to proceed smoothly.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart for determining a drawing stop symbol on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of decorative symbols on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of an effect display device in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram of executing a transparent effect in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of game parts in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a sectional view of the game board in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of the ball return prevention member in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a side view of the first main game starting port attached to the game board in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is cut off after the game ball is shot in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, and then the power supply is restarted. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is interrupted after the game ball is shot in the pachinko game machine provided with the ball entry sensor and the ejection sensor according to the present embodiment, and then the power supply is restarted. . FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the timing at which a game ball launched before the power supply is cut off is detected by the ball entry sensor after the power supply is started in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. . FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the relationship between the attachment portion of the center decoration and the game balls flowing down on the attachment portion in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is flowing down over the continuous nail 1 in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the game board of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the big winning opening device of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the big winning slot device according to this embodiment. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the front cover and the first base portion of the big winning slot device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is an image diagram for explaining a modification according to this embodiment. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a movable accessory device YK1 according to this embodiment. FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the logo accessory and the light guide plate of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing the drive section of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 60 is a front view for explaining the movable range of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a sensor for detecting the position of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment and the detection state of this sensor. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the flow of initial operation processing of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is a perspective view explaining the guide member of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. FIG. 64 is an image diagram for explaining the action of the guide member according to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram relating to the front side surface portion and the back side surface portion of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device. FIG. 66 is a diagram relating to a screw used in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 67 is an outline of the structure of a TFT liquid crystal display. FIG. 68 is a standby screen display image in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 69 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the upper surface of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 71 is a side view of the upper surface of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the upper surface of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 73 is a side view of the upper surface of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 74 shows a bonus end screen and an AT state end screen displayed on the effect display device S40 at the end of the advantageous game, and an image for calling attention (hereinafter, may be referred to as an "attention image"). There is) is an example. FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the size of the attention calling image displayed by the effect display device S40. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the timing of displaying the end screen and the attention calling image on the effect display device S40. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an effect screen (a) suggesting that the cherry combination has been won, and an effect screen (b) during the press order navigation effect and the AT preparation game. FIG. 78 is a diagram explaining the time spent by the player when playing the game in the shortest time. FIG. 79 shows a state in which the previous game was played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 related to the current game was operated immediately after the previous game ended. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the final game of the advantageous game is played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 is operated immediately after. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a state in which the final game of the advantageous game is not played in the shortest time but is played over a long period of time. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a demonstration screen displayed by the effect display device S40. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing images that are repeatedly displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a case where a warning image is always displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which after displaying the end screen on the effect display device S40, the end screen is hidden and only the attention calling image is displayed. FIG. 86 shows a case where an error occurs in the final game of the advantageous game. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a case where an error occurs in a situation where an alert image is displayed at the end of an advantageous game. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a case where power supply is stopped under a situation where an alert image is displayed at the end of an advantageous game. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a case where the effect switch is operated under the condition that the attention calling image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a transparent plate D16 in a pachinko game machine.

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning a prize in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a gate where prize balls are not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" mean, for example, in the configuration of a general prize winning port (so-called attacker), an open state (a state in which the lid of the prize winning port is open). = easy-to-win state, and closed state (state in which the cover of the big-winning opening is closed) = non-easy-to-win state. Also, for example, a state in which the lid (shutter) protrudes from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state in which it is retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as In the case of a configuration (so-called tongue-type attacker) that can take the state of retreating (sometimes referred to as a retracted state), the advance state is an easy win state, and the retracted state is a non-easy win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine certain game content in pachinko gaming machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of games, specifically, "random numbers (random numbers for lottery)" related to the transition to special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of identification information are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be indicated in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but the entrance that triggers the acquisition of random numbers (for example, the start gate, the gate, the general winning entrance) ) is called one random number obtained by one ball entry. called). Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning port can be open, a non-probability variable game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state (high probability state) with a high transition lottery probability to the game state, auxiliary game state (so-called high base state, for example, start In the case where the variable member is attached to the mouth, it is possible to lengthen the open period of the variable member, increase the winning probability of opening the variable member, and shorten the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member. Optional, such as a state in which all of these are valid or a state in which at least one is valid), a non-assisted game state (low base state) without assistance for winning a prize at the starting gate that triggers the transition to a special game lottery is a combination of one or more of "Variable display stop time" means the time to hold the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. After the lapse of time, the change related to the remaining suspension is started (the change start condition and the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition are satisfied). In addition, in this specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game pattern (special pattern) or a decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design). The main game symbols (special symbols) are identification information whose display is controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative symbols (designs for production, design) are identification information as effects displayed on the sub control board side. is. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from a light emitting means (e.g., liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Production” refers to the display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as changes, stops, notices, etc. of identification information, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. A combination of The "decorative pattern" may be in any form as long as the type of pattern can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.). Visual items, such as figures (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, pictures, patterns, etc., are described. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the activated line with a combination of the same numbers and symbols, it is notified that a big win has occurred. "First decorative design (first design for production)" and "second decorative design (second design for production)" are both "decorative designs (design for production, design)". However, it corresponds to one that is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a big hit (for example, the "first decorative pattern (first effect symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit) It is also possible, and it is also possible to notify the occurrence of a big hit with the "second decorative pattern (second effect pattern)" becoming "777"). "Variation mode" means, for example, variation time (variation time of main game pattern (special pattern), variation time of decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design), fluctuation time of normal pattern), decorative pattern A decoration pattern that can be visually recognized by the player by scrolling display (drawing pattern, design) from top to bottom (otherwise, scrolling display from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc. is also possible) A decorative design (design design, design) that can be visually recognized by the player by switching the type of design (design design, design), rotating and displaying the decorative design (design design, design) on the spot and rotating it halfway or once. , binding) (Such scrolling display, rotating display, etc. may be referred to as "switching display mode") and the like. ``Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / not to temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design)'' means that ``temporarily stop → change again'' is one set, and this one set is performed / It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-fluctuation" refers to the situation of "temporarily stopping decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) → re-fluctuation", "starting fluctuation → temporarily changing decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) It is a term that includes the situation such as "stop" and "start of re-fluctuation → temporarily stop the decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design) (temporary stop after the second time)", and in pseudo-continuous production Pseudo fluctuations and revival fluctuations in the revival production (for example, during the super reach production, the combination of decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design) that indicate a loss are temporarily stopped, and the production stage that shifts after the super reach production ends. It is a term that indicates a variation that stops deterministically after temporarily stopping to a decorative pattern that indicates a hit after performing a re-fluctuation at . It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the so-called main game symbols are stop-displayed together with the stop-display) to notify the occurrence or non-occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)" is based on the second element (for example, numbers), and the first element (presence/content of accompanying information such as characters and "SUPER") and the third element (For example, a color effect) or the like may be attached. In addition, "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)", when the production mode is different, even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same letter, same symbol, etc.), the first The element and/or the third element may be configured differently. In addition, due to the difference in the first element and / or the third element, the degree of expectation that the reach variation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol variation related to the look-ahead effect will be a big hit when a specific symbol combination is stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect. Each time, the profit rate for the player, such as the number of rounds at the time of winning the big win and the game state after the end of the big win, may be different. In addition, when configured in such a way, a high probability state and high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and high base state (low probability high base state), a high probability state and low base state (high In the low probability base state), the first element and / or the third element is advantageous for the player compared to the case of the low probability state and low base state (low probability low base state) which is the normal game state It may be configured to be In addition, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including an advance notice effect, etc., and is, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including advance notice effects, etc., and includes, for example, effect display devices, 7-segment LEDs, LED lamps, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

(this embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22 and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the game machine, and output sounds (sound effects) according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, there are a windmill D49, a plurality of game nails (not shown) and various general winning openings, as well as a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, a first A large winning slot C10, a second large winning slot C20, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20, an effect display device SG, an auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38 and an out port D36. is set up. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d changes between a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second main game starter B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the The upper part of the 2 main game start port B10 is blocked. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10 And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starter is arranged. A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to cover the upper portion of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. A game ball flowing down the right side (with reference to the center of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10 while being less likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured so as not to be easily guided {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting openings H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out-port D36, the first big prize-winning port C10 and the second big prize-winning port C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 is horizontally long and is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is shaped and positioned above the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first big winning hole C10 includes a first big winning hole winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (and a first big winning and a solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1. Excite the big winning opening solenoid C13 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In this case, for example, the shutter (bar-shaped member) provided in the big winning opening can adopt an advance state in which it protrudes toward the player and a retracted state in which it retracts toward the player. (A so-called tongue type attacker) may be used, and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops with a big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is positioned above the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening and a solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, the shutter provided in the big winning opening can adopt an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player and a retracted state in which it retracts toward the player (so-called bell type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game pattern (second main game pattern) itself has a role in production and the decorative pattern on the first main game side (decorative pattern on the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG, which will be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG executes the display of performance images including decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and second main game symbols. It is a device that Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first reservation display area SG12 (and a second reservation display area SG13) that displays the main game reservation information, and a plurality of rows of decorative symbols (first decorations) imitating a slot machine game, for example. and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying moving images of patterns and second decorative patterns). In this embodiment, the performance display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first reservation display area SG12 (and the second reservation display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the reservation lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game A main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and a sub-main control unit SM that performs display control etc. related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. Supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize winning holes, the sub control board S having a sub-sub control unit SS for executing the performance display and controlling the overall performance. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls to the upper ball tray D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation of the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball tray D20. A launching device D42 that shoots balls (stored balls) into the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the shooting operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine. , a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) based on the information (signal, command, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M , sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (In this example, the sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS are one board ) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S performs various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stoppage of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display, stop display, pending display and advance notice display of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) on the effect display device SG. It comprises two controls of a sub-sub-control SS for execution. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Here, although not shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by fraud. It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data referenced by game machines with different specifications, or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide data such as data for Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address so as not to provide an unused program area. Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning entrance winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning winning winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, a general winning entrance is an entrance that has prize balls but does not carry out a symbol lottery. )}, drive solenoids (not shown above, first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., input and output essential for progress of the game It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device operable by the player that accepts a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits. In addition, although not shown, in this embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (shooting handle, launching motor, ball feeding device etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), etc., a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects for effects, as described above. It is connected to a drive (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. is configured to In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It consists of elements such as a ROM and a RAM that are used for processing, and a CPU that is used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

First, the main control board M comprises game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and progress of the game such as a special game or a specific game. and the game progress means MP that governs the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to the auxiliary game (easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbols and variation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on/off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ], etc., and various game information {for example, stop pattern information, stop pattern attribute information {for example, 10R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} on the game peripheral device side. , Information on variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal/state information/end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer for accumulating unsent commands MT10) and prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various prize winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entrance (starting opening, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the result of the determination. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entered into each starting hole during variable display as holding balls within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening and closing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10, and the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each pattern. A second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main With respect to the game, the second main game and the auxiliary game, there is a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state is to be shifted, and for performing processing for shifting the game state based on the decision. are doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10, and a second main game start opening. A second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game start opening for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start opening H10. A ball entry determination means MJ11-H, a first big winning hole entry ball determining means MJ11-C10 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10, and a second big winning hole C20 It has a second big winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and according to the determination result, the To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number according to the determination result (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires game pattern determination random numbers, etc.), and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire the auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result and random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or " It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range of 0 to 255. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing the value in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like. Obtaining random numbers in this way makes it possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the holding control means MJ30 controls the holding digestion control means MJ31 that controls the processing related to holding digestion and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission is not granted. A first main game symbol reservation means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the permission for symbol variation is obtained based on the determination result. - A, in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained, and based on the determination result, symbol variation permission is granted for the random number. Second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32-B, and auxiliary game side random numbers obtained in the situation where auxiliary game pattern fluctuation permission is not granted are temporarily stored. Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for judging whether or not to store, and holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted based on the judgment result. have.

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H are combined with a reservation order of random numbers that can store up to four numbers. 1st main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, 2nd main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of are doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a lottery lottery means MN10 for determining whether the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game starter electric accessory B11d can be opened. special game transition determining means MN20 (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number and a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on. Here, the success/failure lottery means MN10 consist of a first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbols, and a second main game success/failure lottery means that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbols. It has MN11-B and an auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success/failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the first main game symbols. a first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the second main game symbols, and a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Each has an auxiliary game success or failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the win/loss lottery based on the main game random numbers, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same value as any of all the winning random number values, or determines whether or not the winning random number value is When part or all of the random numbers are continuous numbers, the winning/failure judgment is executed by judging whether or not the main game random number is equal to or less than the upper limit of the winning random number and equal to or more than the lower limit. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by executing such a right/wrong determination. Conversely, if the success/fail judgment is performed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a danger of being lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. }.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determination means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), A second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number) obtained, and an auxiliary game symbol based on the obtained auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and an auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbols of the MN41-H.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining stop symbols related to the first main game symbols, The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → lottery table for first main game probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining stop symbols related to the second main game symbols. The lottery table MN41ta-B for determining the second main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variation game → lottery table for second main game probability variation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game → normal auxiliary game lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 is the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbols based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game pattern based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number), It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal lottery table for game state, probability variable game → first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbols. , The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game status lottery table, probability variable game→second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game→second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game pattern, and the auxiliary game variation mode The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the 1st main game symbol, and on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the auxiliary game symbol for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display after varying the game symbols.

Here, the first/second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is further provided with an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is used to determine whether or not the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are satisfied. The second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition conditions are satisfied. (Specifically, a special game content determination means MP32 that determines the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big winning Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and a special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the opening and closing times of the C10 and the second big winning hole C20. Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes the first and second big winning opening electric role opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first big winning opening electric role C11d and the second big winning opening electric role C21d. , and a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. In addition, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 includes probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variable game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of times of time saving. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variable game in which the lottery probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game pattern and the number of fluctuations of the second main game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (a probability fluctuation game without time reduction number limit except for). That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) with a predetermined probability every time the pattern changes. (in the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function). It should be noted that the time-reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time-reduction flag is on, or that the auxiliary game time-reduction flag is on, that is, the time-reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is operating (including high probability high base state, low probability high base state), and non-time reduction game state is open time extension function is not operating (low probability low base state is included). It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state. In addition, the high-probability-low base state as another game state is a time-reduced game state when executing a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, and the main game symbols. When the variation time of is not a time shortening game relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, it is preferable to set it as a non-time shortening game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbols to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbols to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of times of time saving, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stop the currently varying first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game pattern information for temporarily storing information such as stop patterns related to the currently fluctuating auxiliary game patterns (auxiliary game patterns in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are the decorative patterns (the first decorative patterns and the second decorative It relates to the display of only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including variations in symbols). These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the shift to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying the second main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is in the closed state during the normal game, and in the special game (big win), the first big winning port C10 is opened under predetermined conditions. and a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing and display control processing of the effect content related to the effect display and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. Each of the above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing pattern information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that governs the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol display control means SM21. 1 decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) reserved number management and reserved display processing; background effect display control means SM23 responsible for background image determination processing and display control processing; It has an advance notice effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls reach effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative design (in this embodiment, two types of decorative design (hereinafter referred to as the first decorative design, the second decorative design The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are independent from each other, and the game is played by combining three number patterns of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. The result can be notified} and the design display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode, and various information (variation mode design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop design information, various flags, etc.); and a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determination means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the content of design variation referred to when determining the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) effect content, display update timing, display update content are determined (or set) decorations that are referred to It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed and controlled independently by the performance display control means SM20 based on the information from the main control board M side. By making good use of the decorative patterns, it is configured to increase the interest in the performance and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game, but this point will be described later.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the reservation related to the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design). .

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determination means SM23n for determining the display contents of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display. and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display control means SM24 includes the notice effect display content determination means SM24n for determining the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, and the information relating to the notice effect display. and a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the announcement effect for temporarily storing the.

Next, the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the ready-to-win effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the ready-to-win effect, and information related to the ready-to-win effect display. and a ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. and a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further has an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information relating to various image displays.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative design display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design), and a first reservation display area SG12 (and second display area) for displaying main game reservation information. 2 reserved display area SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be capable of transmitting information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of the flow of general processing in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly consists of processing steps (indicated by rectangles), judgments (indicated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (indicated by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. . Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in a separate flowchart, those referring to the separate flowchart are shown as subroutines (indicated by rectangles with double lines on the left and right sides). . Here, in the development stage of a game machine, game machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (subroutines that are not normally used) are configured not to be left behind, thereby preventing execution of processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally carried out by the manager of the game arcade or the like. In the case of Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, the information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, at step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the contents stored in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information available). Next, at step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M will store (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M. An information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at that timing, or the command may be set at that timing and a control command (to be described later) may be sent). may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately every 4.0 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing arrives, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value that causes a special game to be executed (immediately after the start of program processing, noise or fraudulent to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, hardware interrupt at approximately 4.0 ms intervals), at step 1100, the main control board M executes auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes main game symbol display processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize winning opening into which the game ball has entered. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and the processing for managing the results, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the processing that was in progress. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received by the sub-main control unit SM is important (for example, by receiving another command after receiving a certain command, the process is normally executed). Therefore, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decided to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands were set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the game machine is powered off, the process of FIG. be done. That is, at step 1020, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at NMI interrupt), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start opening H10 (inflow, passage in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information indicating how many balls are reserved. is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Incidentally, even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flow chart of the electric accessary product driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessary product open flag is off. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and sets the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Along with acquiring, referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, the stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the holding ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H updates the reservation information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the relevant reservation ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has reached. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B, based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), the second main game A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game short time flag is off seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and at the opening time of the electric accessory It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and the auxiliary game state temporary The electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; (Processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A detects first main game start entrance ball information from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1304, at step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, the variation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for determining the variation time) are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, at step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1312 also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304 .

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. Determine whether information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1314, at step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, three random numbers are acquired as the second main game content determination random numbers, the winning/failure lottery random number, the pattern lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, as in the case of the first main game content determining means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, at step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 sends information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). It should be noted that even if No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as the information to be transmitted to the sub-main control section SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that the random number has been obtained is transmitted. The pending number may be sent together, and these pieces of information can be used as information indicating that the random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the pending digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not there is a pending second main game symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in this embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern) Although it is configured to preferentially execute the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, it is not limited to this (pending digestion based on the winning order, and simultaneous parallel execution of both main game symbols It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws lots).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the pending digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not fluctuating, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the pending digestion control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading the temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game Deletion from the design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and shifting the remaining information temporarily stored (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success/failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, A main game pattern winning lottery is executed based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the probability varying gaming state is higher than that in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small win) that cannot shift the game state is not exemplified, but it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, for example, (1) the probability of winning a small win is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is better than the second main game side. (2) If a small win is won, the game state after the end of the small win is the same as the game state before the start of the small win. (If a big win is won, the game state after the end of the big win may be different from the game state before the start of the big win.) (3) Big wins are on the first main game side and the second main game side. The probability of winning is the same between and, and the probability of winning increases due to the state of the probability variable game, whereas the probability of winning is different between the first main game side and the second main game side for the small win. and the winning probability is not changed by entering the probability fluctuation gaming state. ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbols") can be stopped, (5) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation that won the small hit, three of the same symbol Specific numbers that are combinations of numbers that are not uniform and have a certain regularity (for example, order such as "234", reverse order such as "432", odd number order such as "357" etc.) can be stopped, (6) From the player's point of view, a big win (2R or more, the number of rounds is different When viewed from the player's point of view, it looks like a similar opening mode (the small win is only one round, and the big win opening is opened multiple times in that one round, and the big win is opened the same number of times as the multiple times). Executed within a round)} (in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small win or a big win), ( 8) In the second decorative pattern, the "special pattern" dedicated to the small win does not stop (or sometimes does not stop); is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether it is a small win or a big win depends on the type of combination of decorative patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish. If the stop symbols include decorative symbols that make it almost certain that the game will shift to the variable gaming state, the probability of a big hit is higher than when they are not included).

Next, at step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbols are related based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates ("4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B" in this example) are selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 10R for 7A and 7B. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. Alternatively, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game pattern is different from before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). may be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the main game pattern win-or-fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, variation A variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the lottery result of the main game pattern, the main game time saving flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols. That is, when the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time shortening game state) Generally, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is short, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3, the variation time is relatively short compared to when the number of reservations is 0 to 1. It is configured so that the mode can be determined easily (only when losing). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. In addition, it may be configured so that the pattern fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is ON) is relatively long {symbol fluctuation on the second main game side is configured to be advantageous to the player, the pattern fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, and the second main game side is likely to be suspended (which is advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening cannot be separated). In addition, an example of the effect executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in the "effect mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as an effect mode executed on the sub-side, a pseudo-continuous variation (effect in which multiple symbol variations appear to occur during one time variation display of the main game symbols), which will be described later, is performed. After prompting the player whether or not, a "pseudo continuous failure effect" that notifies that the pseudo continuous variation will not be executed may be provided. Random number allocation (execution frequency) of ``Pseudo continuous failure effect → stop losing results'' in the game state is higher when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 than when the number of reservations is 2 to 3. (Both the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state may be configured as such). It may be configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation will be performed after prompting the player whether or not the variation will be performed. In addition, "pseudo consecutive failure effect" and "pseudo consecutive success effect" are effects using "special symbols" or specific numbers described later, for example, when "pseudo consecutive failure effect" is executed, After prompting the player whether or not the "special pattern" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the decorative pattern after one frame of the "special pattern" will stop (temporarily stop) in the middle row, and the "pseudo continuous success effect" will be performed. When it is executed, after prompting the player whether or not the "special symbol" should be temporarily stopped in the middle row, the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row. there is In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). In addition, the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, at step 1414, the game content determination means MN outputs the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , information related to the determined main game symbols such as variation mode information, commands related to the current game state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, at step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time period related to the main game symbol variation time to the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, at step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the main game symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation modes stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, at step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Go to step 1420 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, at step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1470, at step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, at step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the specific game flag (main game probability variation flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Incidentally, even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. to turn on. Next, at step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. Then, if Yes in step 1610 , the process proceeds to step 1612 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, at step 1612, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off. Determine whether or not there is If Yes in step 1612, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric role C21d) of the first big winning mouth C10 to make the first big winning. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614-1620.

Next, at step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, at step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10 It is determined whether or not there is a prize-winning ball. If Yes at step 1624 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big winning opening is Determine whether or not it has passed. If Yes at step 1626 , the process also proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 executes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second big winning opening C20). The drive is stopped to close the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20). Next, at step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer). Next, at step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Incidentally, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variable game state It is a big hit pattern to be shifted, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes at step 1652, at step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variable game state after the execution of the special game, 4A and 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1997 process).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26, control processing executed by the sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control unit SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 1(a) is the process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after reset such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control section SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, When various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the performance at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). Next, at step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the value of the drawing reservation reservation counter) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next variation. After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 1(c) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line of the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, at step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to new reservation occurrence It is determined whether or not the reservation information related to the game design has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, in step 2106, the design reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the reservation information (especially, the random number and the reservation prefetch group information related to the main game symbol lottery) ) is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means for book binding information SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the design reserve information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to see if it has received a pattern variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2111, at step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the design reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the design reservation information related to the pattern variation (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , to shift the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2118 also in the case of No in step 2111 .

Next, in step 2118, the design reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display area SG12 and the second reservation display area SG13). The same number of reserved images as the drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, at step 2202, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2202, at step 2204, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2206, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) by referring to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation. is a so-called decorative symbol to be controlled, and details of its display size and operation contents will be described later). 7" and other numbers (hitting numbers), and in the case of a losing pattern, numbers such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game pattern is for a short time In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance) Temporarily stored in related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. ) is one line, and if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, in the left, middle and right rows (or only in the middle row), in addition to number patterns, "special patterns" (when displayed on the effective line, do not mean a big hit, but after that The display size and details of the operation will be described later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and the number patterns can also be temporarily stopped during the pattern fluctuation. It is It should be noted that the temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols of all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative symbols are , refers to a state in which variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo-continuous variation is not included in the stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (provisional stop), is not fixed, and notifies the big hit. It is constructed so that the "special symbol" at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect can be temporarily stopped (provisional stop), can be fixedly stopped, and is not included in the stop mode for informing a big hit. .

Next, at step 2208, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, the second decorative symbol (as described above, the display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side. (The details of the display size and operation contents will be described later). (For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7.7 ”, and in the case of a losing pattern, a random number such as “1, 3, 5”} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game pattern fluctuates for a short time In the case of , non-reach, if it is a long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related Temporarily stored in information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. , and if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, only number patterns can be stopped in the left, middle, and right columns (the "special pattern" does not stop like the first decorative pattern), and it is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the pattern fluctuation. . In this way, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to independently determine the display contents for notifying the success or failure of the main game symbols, that is, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols The decorative symbols have, as their basic properties, the property that they can independently report the winning/losing results related to the main game symbols.

Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2218, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbols. Regardless of which of the variable displays is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be executed in conjunction with it. However, in the time shortened game state (state accompanied by so-called power supply state), this is not the case. It is possible to exemplify a state in which only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is allowed to perform the variable display in conjunction with any of the display.

Here, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1; And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 2, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit. In the drawings, for simplicity, the first decorative design may be referred to as the first design, and the second decorative design may be referred to as the second design (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of winning or failing the main game pattern (illustrated in the leftmost column, in this example, "losing" or "big hit") and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) variation mode (illustrated in the second column on the left, in this example only in the case of "pseudo continuous failure (total performance time 30 seconds)" "super reach (total performance time 60 seconds)" example) and obtained random numbers (random numbers obtained on the sub-main board SM side, part of which is shown in the third column on the left). In this example, it is configured to be able to determine "Main effect A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", "Main effect B-1 (big win) no pseudo-run", etc.). Then, when the content of the decorative pattern effect is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative pattern effect content = “A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)” and “display update content” = “equipment Figure fluctuation start (all columns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern)", "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (left column), 2nd binding non-display". Then, as will be described later, according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the "display update content" reaching the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol. It will be executed sequentially with respect to each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo run 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbols and all columns of the second decorative symbols are variably displayed, "display update timing" = "variation start 12 seconds later", if display control is performed so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (not displayed even if they are being variably displayed), then the second decorative pattern is , Display is controlled so that all columns are variably displayed (the variably displayed state becomes visible), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative pattern , the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative pattern is controlled so that all columns are not displayed (even the variable display is not displayed). . Thus, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. While being in a state of being invisible (difficult to see), when the first decorative pattern is in a state of being invisible (difficult to see) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player ( In other words, in order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbols are changing, the second decorative symbols are displayed complementarily. In addition, the production pattern (series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1" is different from the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative symbol production contents (that is, the display contents are different ). In addition, the range of random numbers is "0 to 1023" in all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range in the design variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain design variation mode The random number range of the acquired random number value and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the different illustration variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". range).

Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo-continuous variation can be executed. (Losing) pseudo-run 2” and “B-2 (big hit) pseudo-run 2”. For example, in the decorative pattern effect content “A-2 (losing) pseudo-continuation 2”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “start of design fluctuation (first 1 decorative design and all rows of the second decorative design)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after start of fluctuation", "14 seconds after start of fluctuation" Display update content” = “1st drawing temporary stop display (left column)” (left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)” (1st decorative pattern The right column is the stop display), and the "first design special design temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decoration design is the above-mentioned "special design" stop display) are sequentially executed. Then, after that, in the "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first decoration fluctuation start (all columns)" (only the first decoration pattern is displayed again with fluctuation) After execution, "display update timing" = "26 seconds after start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "1st layout temporary stop display ( left column)” (the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding temporary stop display (right column)” (the right column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding special pattern "Temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with the above-mentioned "special symbols") is sequentially executed, so that for the player, during the one-time fluctuation display of the main game symbols, the As for one decorative pattern, it seems as if a plurality of pattern fluctuations have occurred.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the stationary display/variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern" The second decorative pattern is variably displayed when the game is temporarily stopped by pressing the second decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed in other cases. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol If the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol or cannot determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) cannot be distinguished}, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can always choose one of them. The decoration pattern (either the first decoration pattern or the second decoration pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In this embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop. Since the main purpose is to increase This is because symbols that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as symbols that foretell the possibility of a big win afterward, are not displayed. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), it may include a state of being displayed fluctuating at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible). In the case of "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the state of being displayed fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from above and (temporary) fluctuation state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second decorative design is configured so as not to temporarily stop in the middle of the fluctuation (and the "special design" does not stop), but it is not limited to this, and the second decorative design As with the first decorative symbol, it may be configured such that a temporary stop can be made during the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbols and all the rows of the second decorative symbols have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is performed. It is configured so that the types of symbols to be displayed are different.

Further, the second decorative symbols need not always be displayed during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) During the occurrence of a specific effect (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, an effect such as playing a movie moving image using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-win effect (the second decorative pattern can be displayed), It is time to execute a ready-to-win performance in which the degree of expectation for a big hit remarkably increases instead of making the 1 decorative pattern invisible, and for example, the content of the performance displayed on the performance display device SG is forcibly stopped temporarily. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing the so-called freeze reach production), and the second decorative pattern is hidden in other ready-to-win productions (especially during the execution of ready-to-win production with low expectations for big hits), 3) Differentiate the appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the effect display device SG according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-described movable accessory for effect moves into a state where it covers the display area on the effect display device SG). (4) The first decorative pattern can be moved, reduced, or enlarged. On the other hand, the second decorative design cannot be moved, reduced, or enlarged, or the probability of execution of movement, reduction, or enlargement, movement width, reduction rate, enlargement rate, etc. is the same as the first decorative design. It may be lower than, etc.

In addition, during a specific ready-to-win effect or in a situation where the first decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state (for example, in a situation where the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped with the same pattern), the second decorative pattern fluctuates. It may be configured as shown.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 2302, at step 2304, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2306, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2309, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even if No in step 2302 , the process proceeds to step 2310 .

Next, at step 2310, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2310, at step 2312, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2314, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2330 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2318, at step 2320, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is time to stop the above-mentioned "special design" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 puts an angel zone flag (for notifying that the expectation of a big hit will increase) in the flag area of the temporary storage means SM21b of the decoration display related information. A flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to step 2324 as well. Next, at step 2324, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative design (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). is executed) and the process proceeds to step 2330 . In the present embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, an "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect. , (1) during pattern fluctuations with relatively high expectations for big hits (for example, pattern fluctuations that result in reach), (2) at the time of stoppage of pattern fluctuations related to holding scheduled to be completed before pattern fluctuations with high expectations for big hits, etc. In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or may be temporarily stopped in the case of (2) described above. You may stop after confirming.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2326, at step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command for the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2326 , the process proceeds to step 2330 .

Next, in step 2330, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative design is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative design). or when it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, and when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes at step 2330, at step 2332, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second design display flag (with regard to the second decorative design to the non-display state) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag for switching between ON=OFF and display=ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No at step 2330, at step 2334, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, at step 2336, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (fixed display command) of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2340, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2342, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Note that even if No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM uses the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 to manage the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like. However, the method of managing the timing related to the variation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. Timing, notice image/reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design display flag is ON. . In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2356, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design variable display execution command (command for variably displaying the second decorative design) (display command transmission at step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2354, at step 2358, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design variable display erase command (command for hiding the second decorative design) (step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 .

Next, at step 2360, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2364, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Incidentally, even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the pending display (the pending for the first main game pattern and the pending for the second main game pattern may be displayed at the same time) are the effects display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in this embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the fixed display timing (timing when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed), etc. Since the first decorative pattern is the main decorative pattern, the visibility of the first decorative pattern is higher than that of the second decorative pattern (the displayed area is presumably larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start timing and the variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2402, at step 2404, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. Big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of big win), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2402 , the process proceeds to step 2412 .

Next, at step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. It may be executed appropriately as necessary based on the type, etc.).

Next, at step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot being executed and the jackpot symbols being stopped ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (For example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variable jackpot symbol, the transition to the probability variable game state after the special game is completed. An effect that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, at step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2414, at step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, at step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). . Note that even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2502, at step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and step 2506. transition to Next, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the change (a part of the pseudo-continuous change) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" has ended. determine whether If Yes at step 2506, at step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No at step 2502, at step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes at step 2512, at step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). . Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2516, at step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, the stages are looped in the order of flatland stage→space stage→volcano stage→flatland stage). Go), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520 . It should be noted that step 2520 is also executed when the result of step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516 is No.

Next, at step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side). is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (variable display) in a state where the display/variation display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always select one of the decorative symbols. A user-friendly game machine can be provided that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not the stopped symbols and the jackpot symbols are stopped.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the temporary stop symbol in the middle row always stops the "special symbol", and during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the first 2 The decorative pattern is configured to be hidden, but the display control method of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modification 1 from the present embodiment, and only the points of modification from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative symbol effect table 3, decorative symbol effect table 4) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 3, especially part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , a decorative symbol production table 4, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative pattern will be described in detail as to the changes from the present embodiment. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be displayed even during fluctuation. Also, for example, when executing a pseudo-continuous variation such as "A-6 (losing) pseudo consecutive 2 (specific appearance)", at the timing of temporary stop of the middle symbol, the specific appearance is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" configured to be able to Here, a specific pattern is different from a "special pattern" in that all columns (left, middle, and right) are stopped with numbers, but are stopped according to a certain rule. (For example, an order such as "345"), and is configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific number. In addition, in the modification 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, in the case of a loss, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, it is easier to stop the specific number than the "special symbol". On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbols" are easier to stop than the specific symbols at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the is stopped. It should be noted that the game is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbol" stops. Also, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are changed again, that is, after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, the three symbols are changed again, but in such a case , If the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row changes again, the decoration pattern in the middle row at the start of the re-fluctuation is no longer a "special pattern" {for example, "6 7 (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of "667" (it is desirable that the middle symbol is the right symbol or the left symbol "± 1" frame)} Alternatively, when the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, three patterns of "667" are temporarily stopped behind the "special pattern", and then the "special pattern" is changed again. The first decorative pattern in the left row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row, and the first decorative pattern in the right row may be changed again when they are erased. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" is displayed in the form of a pseudo continuous variation that displays the specific number. Since it is only necessary to display it, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

Next, changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are always displayed while the main game symbols are changing. In the case of ready-to-win, the second decorative pattern is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed at the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.). In addition, the variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the specific number is stopped. In the case of middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while when the "special pattern" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed (or temporarily stop display). In addition, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbols. Also, the second decorative pattern may be always changed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern, and only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous variation can be achieved by configuring so that the specific number can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. It is possible to provide a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution, and to make the degree of expectation for a big win different depending on the stop modes, so that the player can pay attention to which of the stop modes is. As a result, the amusement of the game is enhanced.

In addition, in Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be variably displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured not to variably display (hide), or may be configured to hide only a specific column (for example, middle column).

In addition, in Modification 1 from the present embodiment, it is configured such that the specific outcome (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row, but the specific outcome (or "special symbol") ) may be changed in the display mode of the left and right columns, for example, (1) the same number in the left column and the right column, and ±1 (For example, "4, 5, 4" or a "special symbol" is placed at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) in the same stop mode as a losing eye that is not a specific eye (3) Temporary stop in all columns at the same time (5) If the left and right column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more, the middle column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more from the left and/or right columns. It may be assumed that the temporary stop is made due to a failure at . In addition, the appearance condition of the specific outcome may also be changed. For example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to differ from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) after the reach is higher than the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) when it is not the reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured such that there is a high possibility of temporary stop again. In addition, as shown in (1), the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is the same number ± 1 number, or the middle column and the right column are the numbers of the left column. In the case of numbers such as ±1 or ±2, in other words, when the numbers in the middle and right columns are predetermined based on the numbers in the left column, only the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery. For the numbers displayed in the middle and right columns, the same numbers as the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery or the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery are ±1 or ±2. (that is, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery or the like, but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined). For example, if the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N+1, and the right column is N, the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery or the like from 1 to 8. . If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4 + 1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and the specific outcome will be "4, 5, 4" set. By configuring in this way, a specific number is set using a table in which only the numbers in the left column are set without using a table in which a plurality of specific numbers are set as a combination of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine the specific number in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200 . In the above example, the numbers in the left column are determined by lottery, and the numbers in the middle and right columns are determined based on the numbers in the left column. For column numbers, left and right column numbers may be determined, and for right column numbers, left and middle column numbers may be determined.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation was mentioned in the present embodiment and Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration New playability can be created by the configuration of the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is Modified Example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the points changed from Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative symbol effect table 5, decorative symbol effect table 6) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 5, in particular, part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , the decorative pattern production table 6, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail with respect to the modification 1 from the present embodiment. In the modification 2 from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the variation of the first decorative symbol and that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation are "special symbol A" and " There are two types of "special pattern B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be temporarily stopped from the first middle row temporary stop timing (even after this timing) in the pseudo continuous variation, while the "special symbol B" is a pseudo continuous variation. It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second temporary stop timing of the middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured so that a temporary stop can be made from the first middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after this timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous variation At the temporary stop timing, as a stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are configured so that three types of specific numbers can be temporarily stopped. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, in the provisional stop timings in the middle row of the pseudo-continuous variation, the number of types of stop modes may increase toward the second half of the temporary stop timings, or the number of types of stop modes may increase toward the second half of the temporary stop timings. may be configured to reduce In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases toward the second half of the temporary stop timing, there is a stop mode with a high degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit as the selection candidate type each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be newly added, and by configuring in such a way, the player's attention will be focused each time a pseudo-variation is performed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing of the second half is reached, a stop mode with a low expectation that the variation will be a big hit is selected as the selection candidate type each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be deleted, and by configuring in such a way, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit every time the pseudo variation is executed. In addition, since the second decorative pattern has the same configuration as that of Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, the temporary stop timing can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing is in the latter half. By increasing the number of stop modes, the player will pay attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stop mode at the time of the temporary stop, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two kinds of decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided. state), or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the second decorative design is displayed (variable display), but the configuration using the second decorative design is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as modification example 3 from this embodiment, and only the modifications from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are steps 2232 (variant 3) to step 2236 (variant 3), step 2900 (variant 3), step 2246 (variant 3) and step 2248 (variant 3), that is, step 2204 At step 2232 (variant 3), after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the current game state is the probability variable game state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2234 (variant 3), the design display content determining means SM21n sets the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the probability variable display mode (during the probability variable gaming state display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed), and proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2236 (variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the non-variable display mode ( The display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed during the non-probability variation gaming state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to be different depending on whether or not the probability variation gaming state, and the first decoration When the pattern display mode changes (for example, when the non-probability variable game state shifts to the probability variable game state), the display mode of the second decoration pattern is also changed along with the change. It should be noted that the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether the state is a variable probability game state. It may be configured so as to differ depending on which production (production stage) is.

Next, at step 2900 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n executes design stop design determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2246 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols. Next, at step 2248 (Variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the design stopping design determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variant 3) in FIG. 31 in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, at step 2902, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol stop symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the number of rounds to be executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not 10R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "outline" designs (for example, "777") and Decide on one of the three sets of "black" patterns (for example, "444") (three sets of "white" patterns are selected) is 1:1 with the total allocation ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "black" designs (for example, "444"). One of them is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 10R) in the case of a special game. In other words, it is almost certain that a special game with the maximum number of rounds (10R in this example) will be executed when three white symbols are stopped. (It may be relatively more profitable for the player than a triplet of "black" symbols).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the design display content determination means SM1n determines the stop design of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design. Next, at step 2912, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the second decorative design to a predetermined lost design (in this example, "345"), and the stop design of the second decorative design is only one pattern. ), and shifts to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. It should be noted that the number of types of stop symbols of the second decorative design may not be limited to one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types of stop designs of the first decorative design is smaller than that of the first decorative design. Further, the stop symbol when the second decorative symbol is lost is a predetermined missing symbol (in this example, "345"), while the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is lost is selected from a plurality of candidates. (for example, randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency of stopping the predetermined losing symbol at the time of losing is higher for the second decorative symbol than for the first decorative symbol ( It may be configured such that a predetermined lost symbol does not stop as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol). In addition, for all the stoppable losing symbols of the second decorative symbols (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used), when three of the same symbols are aligned, the highest value for the player is obtained in any game state. It may be configured such that at least one profitable symbol (eg, "7" symbol) is always included (eg, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative design in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are changed depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability varying gaming state or the probability varying gaming state. The display modes (in this example, display colors, display attributes such as color pattern, shape, size, etc.) are configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variation gaming state, only the "7" pattern is displayed in "white" along with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and all patterns other than "7" are " While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (becomes a non-variable display mode), when it is in the probability variation gaming state, "3" symbols and "7" symbols are displayed along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured such that the display mode can be different (probability variable display mode) depending on the game state. The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether it is in the probability variable game state, but it may be in the time reduction game state or not, and it is different depending on which background production (production stage) is being executed. It may be configured to allow In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether it is in the probability variable gaming state is the "3" symbol. It is included in a combination of predetermined losing symbols ("345" in this example) that causes the second decorative symbol to stop at the time of losing (becomes a stop symbol in the left column), and in a non-probability variable gaming state. , the stop symbols of the second decorative symbols at the time of loss are all displayed in "black", while in the probability variation gaming state, the stop symbols of the second decorative design at the time of loss are displayed in "white" from the left column. , “black”, and “black”. In this figure, the configuration is after comparison between the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. There may be (the non-probability variable gaming state in this figure may be the non-time shortened gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state may be the time shortening gaming state), the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening game It may be a configuration after comparing the state and the probability variation gaming state (the non-probability variation gaming state in this figure is the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is the time shortening game state and probability variation game state). It should be noted that such replacement of comparison fitting is applicable to all configurations, such as any embodiment and modification of the present application.

Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative symbol effect table 7, decorative symbol effect table 8) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 7, in particular, part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 8, especially a part of the case where the hit/fail result is a big hit). The difference from the present embodiment is that the item of decorative design type is changed to display update type, and three items of "first decorative design", "second decorative design" and "transmissive liquid crystal" are provided. In the modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect, and during the period when the transparent effect is being executed, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but the second decorative pattern is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3). In 1 (variant 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 performs a transparent effect (effect It is determined whether or not it is time to execute an effect in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. If Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). and transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. FIG. In addition, when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and the state in which the accessories in the effect display device SG are driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative pattern is displayed. is erased (becomes hidden), and the second decorative design is continuously displayed by the second decorative design display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, a pending number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). By configuring in this way, the player can visually recognize the number of pending games even during execution of the transparent effect.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2410 (variant 3), that is, after setting the command related to the big hit display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (step (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are displayed even during execution of the special game. Whether or not the special game is being executed can be determined even during execution of the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative pattern display device is provided on the far side (as seen from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( Light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative pattern and the pending number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, by outputting light from the light source, it is possible to display effects in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative symbol and the display area of the reserved number by the two decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. It should be noted that even during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is being executed, so that the player can visually recognize the effect. By configuring in this way, even in a situation where the transparent effect is being executed, the player can recognize the changing state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. In addition, the display of the number of reservations may differ depending on the game state (for example, the first main game reservation number is displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and the display the second main game reserve number), the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may always be displayed, or the sum of the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may be configured to display the number of pending Note that the configuration for displaying effects in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display area SG10 can be switched between a transmissive state and a non-transmissive state. (For example, light is output from the oblique rear of the display area, etc.), or a light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from the light emitting element that enters from the side) is used. A display area (so-called edge-light type) in which display is performed through a display area, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like may be used. In addition, as an example of a configuration using a light guide plate, as seen from the player side, from the front side, "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", "light guide plate {arranged close to the transparent liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm), and the light guide plate A light source A for spreading light to the light guide plate is arranged near the outer periphery of the light guide plate}”, “Light source B constantly outputting light to the lower left of the display area SG10”, “role item”, “role When the light source C for emphasizing the object to be seen by the player is arranged in order, and a transmission effect is executed (when the player wants to emphasize the character to be seen by the player), the output of the light source A is turned OFF (light source The output of A may be reduced more than when the transparent effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned ON, and the transparent effect is not executed (the player does not want to show the character to the player, and When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the output of the light source A and the light source B is turned ON, and the output of the light source C is turned OFF may be configured). In addition, the display of the second decorative design and the number of reserved display areas is not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the second decorative design display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10) , The second decorative pattern and the pending number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by a mechanism similar to the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10, that is, Since the second decorative pattern display device substitutes for the light source, the second decorative pattern display device always outputs light even when the transmission performance is executed and the light source does not output the light, thereby the second decorative pattern display device. And the display in the reserved number display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to block the transmission of liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram of execution of a transparent effect in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state) (Pseudo consecutive 2 variation) One symbol variation is performed. This is an example of a case where First, a certain decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) starts to change, and then the special design is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop design. After that, the variation of certain decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is started again, and after that, the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game The player can visually recognize the state in which the accessory is driven (as viewed from the player). After that, the transparent effect is completed (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), and the accessory behind the display area SG10 (from the player's point of view) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is performed again. Visible (displayed). After that, in the case of losing, the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop at the losing design {the second decorative design stops at a predetermined losing design ("345"), and the first decorative design stops at the losing design. It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the losing symbol ("787")}. Also, in the case of a big hit, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped at the big winning design {the big winning design of the first decorative design and the big winning design of the second decorative design are the same combinations of stop designs. is going}. After that, a special game is executed, and even during execution of the special game, the second decorative symbols continue to be stop-displayed in the same jackpot pattern as when the special game is started. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special game, a transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to a transparent state), for example, after the special game ends, the effect of informing whether or not the probability variable game state will be entered. By structuring so that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before execution, the player can increase the expectation of shifting to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. In addition, even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area is maintained (because it is visible), so the progress of the game is not hindered. is configured as follows. As an example of display of decorative patterns during a special game, for example, during a special game, in order to inform the player which three decorative patterns are combined to form a big hit, only one pattern is displayed. (For example, if '777' results in a big hit, '7' is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the aligned symbols are not visible to the player. may be configured to maintain the display of the second decorative symbol and the pending number display area even during the special game in order to make it recognizable.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the character objects in the effect display device SG are visible. Even if the effect is executable and the first decorative pattern is hidden during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display in the second decorative pattern display device is executed, so the player can display the second decorative pattern. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the changing state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations, so that the gaming machine can be made more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry into the second main game start port B10 Different rates and different display attributes of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) depending on whether or not the probability variable gaming state is present can suggest or notify the player of high profit. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is more likely to enter the second main game start port B10 than the non-probability variable game state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first main game start port A10. The number of types of display attributes of the jackpot pattern, which is almost certain to transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over, has increased, and currently It is possible to appropriately suggest or inform the player whether or not the game state of (1) is highly profitable for the player.

In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, regardless of the variation of either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the The decorative symbols of the display attributes are variably displayed, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the first main game symbols and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the second main game symbols are displayed (and display attributes) in common. (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a game component (also referred to as a game board front component) on the game board D35 of the pachinko game machine will be described. First, let me explain the directions. As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the game board D35 is viewed from the front, the vertical direction is the Y axis and the horizontal direction is the X axis. Also, as shown in FIG. 40(b), when the surface of the game board D35 on which the game parts are attached faces left, the vertical direction is the Y axis and the horizontal direction is the Z axis. In (a) of FIG. 40, the Y direction + (plus) is on the top, the Y direction - (minus) is on the bottom, the X direction + (plus) is on the right, and the X direction - (minus) is on the left. In (b), up is the Y direction + (plus), down is the Y direction - (minus), front (left in the figure) is the Z direction + (plus), back (right in the figure) is the Z direction. - (minus).

As shown in FIG. 40(a), a center decoration D38 as a game part is screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. , screw BS12, screw BS13, etc., and is attached to the approximate center of the front surface of the game board D35. In addition, the game parts attached to the front surface of the game board D35 are not limited to the center decoration D38. Opening C10, second big winning opening C20, left general winning opening P10, right general winning opening P20, out opening D36, outer rail D32, inner rail D34, ball return prevention member D39, main display device MH20 (first main game pattern The display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20), the sub display device SH20, etc., may be used, and these game parts are screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 in the same way as the center decoration D38. , is attached to the front surface of the game board D35. In addition, on the rear surface of the game board D35, there are a movable accessory YK, a back unit (not shown) to which a performance display device SG is attached, and a discharge channel for discharging game balls that have entered various winning holes to the outside. (not shown) is attached. Note that the discharge channel may be provided in the back unit. Also, although an example of attaching the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 has been shown, it may be configured to be attached to the back unit instead of the game board D35, and the center decoration D38 is configured to be arranged in the game area D30. It's fine if you do.

The first main game starting port A10 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS9 and BS14 which are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The second main game start port B10 is attached to the game board D35 using screws (not shown) that are screwed onto the flow path of game balls in the game area D30. The auxiliary game starting port H10 is attached to the game board D35 using screws (not shown) that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The first big winning hole C10 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS15 and BS16 which are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The second big winning hole C20 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS15 and BS16 which are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The left general prize winning port P10 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS6 and BS7 which are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The right general winning hole P20 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS15 and BS16 that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The out port D36 is attached to the game board D35 using a screw (not shown) that is screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The outer rail D32 is attached to the game board D35 using screws (not shown) that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The inner rail D34 is attached to the game board D35 using screws (not shown) that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The ball return prevention member D39 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS3 and BS4 which are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The main display device MH20 is attached to the game board D35 using screws (not shown) that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30. The sub-display device SH20 is attached to the game board D35 using screws BS6 and BS7 that are screwed onto the flow path of the game balls in the game area D30.

FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 40(a). As shown in this figure, the center ornament D38 has an eaves (predetermined portion) D38-1 on which a game ball shot to the upper surface (upper surface) of the upper area in front view can roll. The canopy part D38-1 is located in the first area of the game area D30, and forms an inclined surface (inclining in the downward direction) that descends from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko game machine. there is Incidentally, the eaves portion D38-1 may be the upper surface (upper surface) of the upper area of the center decoration D38 located in the range of the first area when viewed from the front, and a part or all of this upper surface corresponds. The eaves portion D38-1 may be a portion of the upper surface of the center decoration D38 that slopes downward most toward the front, or may be an arbitrary range of the upper surface of the center decoration D38. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 is α degrees (an angle greater than 90 degrees, for example, 95 degrees with respect to the game board D35, as shown in FIG. 40(b). 5 degrees downward toward the front side.In other words, the Z axis on the + side of the Z direction is displaced 5 degrees from the intersection of the Z axis and the Y axis toward the Y axis on the Y direction -. there is On the other hand, the angle of inclination of the lower surface of the canopy D38-1 is β degrees (an angle smaller than 90 degrees, for example, 85 degrees with respect to the game board D35, as shown in FIG. 40(b). = 180 degrees - α degrees). The pachinko game machine itself is installed on the game island so as to be inclined from the front side to the rear side (for example, one degree inclination from the front side to the rear side). is an inclination from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko machine itself (for example, a 1 degree inclination from the front side to the rear side. In other words, the Z axis on the + side of the Z direction is the intersection point of the Z axis and the Y axis is shifted 1 degree toward the Y-axis in the Y direction from the rear side to the front side. In other words, the Z axis on the positive side in the Z direction is displaced 4 degrees from the intersection of the Z axis and the Y axis toward the Y axis in the negative Y direction. Therefore, when the first area of the game area D30 is shot as a target and the game ball shot to the game area D30 lands on the inclined surface of the canopy part D38-1, the game ball is shot from the rear side. It is configured to be able to roll (flow down) toward the front side.

Here, when the pachinko game machine provided with the center decoration D38 in the game area D30 is installed on the game island in a state inclined from the front side to the rear side, the game balls flowing down the game area D30 stay on the center decoration D38. If such a situation occurs that the other game balls are prevented from flowing down, the game cannot be played, which is one of the reasons why the player loses interest in the game.

In order to solve such a problem, a center decoration D38 is provided at a predetermined position (approximately in the center) of the game area D30 of the game board D35 on which the game area D30 in which the game ball can flow down is provided. Driving (implanting) game nails. In addition, screws (screws, fastening means, locking means, fixtures) are provided. An eaves portion (predetermined portion) D38-1 is provided on the upper surface of the front view region of the center ornament D38, and the eaves portion (predetermined portion) D38-1 is configured to descend from the rear side toward the front side.

By constructing in this way, even when the pachinko game machine is installed on the game island with the pachinko game machine tilted from the front side to the rear side, it is possible to prevent the game balls from remaining on the game parts. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40(a), a game nail (for example, a game nail 1) is driven into the game board D35 in the first region near and to the left of the eaves D38-1 of the center ornament D38. is This game nail is driven at an angle of 90 degrees with respect to the game board D35 as shown in FIG. 40(b). configured to be smaller than In other words, α degrees, which is the angle of the inclined surface, which is the upper surface of the eaves D38-1, with respect to the game board D35 is set larger than 90 degrees, which is the angle of the game nail with respect to the game board D35. Since the pachinko game machine itself is installed on the game island so as to tilt from the front side to the rear side (for example, a 1-degree tilt from the front side to the rear side), the angle of the game nail does not match the angle of the game island. When the pachinko machine is installed, the angle is the same as the angle of inclination from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko machine itself. A game nail may be driven into the game board D35 at an angle opposite to that set on the game island.

The protrusion length of the eaves D38-1 and the game nail (the length of protrusion from the game board D35 toward the transparent plate D16) is the same length in FIG. 40(b), The game nail may have a longer projecting length than the eaves D38-1, or the eaves D38-1 may have a longer projecting length than the game nails. The distance between the game nail and the transparent plate D16 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the canopy part D38-1 and the transparent plate D16 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball. I wish I had. With this configuration, the game ball cannot pass between the game nail and the transparent plate D16 and between the eaves D38-1 and the transparent plate D16, while the game ball cannot pass through the screws as described later. By making it possible to pass between the transparent plate D16, it is possible to configure the game ball to flow down the intended flow path.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40(a), a flow path (specific portion) D38-2 is provided in the left area (third area) of the center decoration D38 when viewed from the front. A game ball flowing down from the channel (specific part) D38-2 rolls to the left and right in the area under the eye, and is then dropped so that the ball enters the first main game start port A10. A rolling part D38-3 is provided. Specifically, the flow path D38-2 is located on the left side of the rolling part D38-3 and above the rolling part D38-3, and the warp provided in the left area of the center decoration D38 It is a flow path through which a game ball entered from the entrance WP flows down to the rolling part D38-3. The lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is not inclined downward from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko game machine like the canopy part D38-1, and the pachinko game machine is self-supporting without being installed on the game island. in the horizontal position (parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the outer frame D12 of the pachinko game machine, and is 90 degrees with respect to the game board D35. The inclination of the Z-axis on the + side in the Z direction is 0 degrees. That is, , the Z-axis on the Z-direction + side is not displaced from the intersection of the Z-axis and the Y-axis toward the Y-axis in the Y-direction + or the Y-direction −. Incidentally, the pachinko game machine itself is installed on the game island so as to incline from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree incline from the front side to the rear side). , When the pachinko game machine is installed on the game island, the inclination angle is the same as the inclination angle from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko game machine itself, but the lower surface of the flow path D38-2 is set on the game island by the pachinko game machine. The pachinko machine is configured so that the pachinko machine is inclined downward from the rear side to the front side, which is the angle of inclination opposite to the angle of inclination at which the pachinko machine is installed on the game island in advance so that it is horizontal in the state where it is installed. may The bottom surface of the flow path D38-2 is inclined such that the X-axis descends from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front.

In addition, a flow path D38-4 is provided in the right region of the center decoration D38 when viewed from the front. The flow path D38-4 is located on the right side of the rolling part D38-3 and above the rolling part D38-3, and enters from the warp entrance WP provided in the left area of the center decoration D38. It is a flow path through which the hit game ball flows down after flowing down to the rolling part D38-3. The lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is not inclined downward from the back side to the front side of the pachinko game machine like the eaves part D38-1, and the pachinko game machine is self-supporting without being installed on the game island. in the horizontal position (parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the outer frame D12 of the pachinko game machine, and is 90 degrees with respect to the game board D35. The inclination of the Z-axis on the + side in the Z direction is 0 degrees. That is, , the Z-axis on the Z-direction + side is not displaced from the intersection of the Z-axis and the Y-axis toward the Y-axis in the Y-direction + or the Y-direction −. Since the pachinko game machine itself is installed on the game island so as to be inclined from the front side to the rear side (for example, a one-degree inclination from the front side to the rear side), the lower surface of the flow path D38-4 is , When the pachinko game machine is installed on the game island, the inclination angle is the same as the inclination angle from the front side to the rear side of the pachinko game machine itself. The pachinko machine is configured so that the pachinko machine is inclined downward from the rear side to the front side, which is the angle of inclination opposite to the angle of inclination at which the pachinko machine is installed on the game island in advance so that it is horizontal in the state where it is installed. may The bottom surface of the flow path D38-4 is inclined such that the X-axis descends from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, the lower surface of the flow path (specific part) D38-2 is an inclined surface that descends from the rear side to the front side in a state where the pachinko game machine is installed on the game island (for example, angle of inclination of 1 degree). In other words, a flow path (specific portion) D38-2 as a flow path for the game ball is provided at a position above the rolling part D38-3 beside the rolling part D38-3, and this flow path D38- The angle (eg, 1 degree) of the inclined surface (lower surface) of 2 is configured to be smaller than the angle (eg, 5 degrees) of the inclined surface of the eaves portion D38-1 (the angle of the inclined surface of the eaves portion D38-1 is The angle of the inclined surface of the channel D38-2 is larger than that of the inclined surface of the channel D38-2). With this configuration, the angle of the inclined surface of the flow path D38-2 located on the left side of the rolling part D38-3 is made smaller than that of the canopy part D38-1, thereby allowing the game ball to move forward. It becomes difficult for the game ball to fall, and the opportunity for the game ball to stay on the rolling part can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the inclined surface configured such that the angle of the inclined surface that descends from the rear side to the front side is smaller than the angle of the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 such as the game nail and the flow path D38-2 Partial or all inclined surfaces of the rails, the top surface of the large winning opening (first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20) having a shutter (lid) that slides back and forth (game around the large winning opening (where the ball can roll), the lowermost inclined surface of the game area D30 (for example, the inclined surface of the bottom of the out port D36), and the like.

In the vicinity of the eaves D38-1, on the right side of the game nail 1, there is provided a screw BS1 for attaching the center decoration D38, which is a component screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30. . Furthermore, in the second area where the game ball that has flowed down in the first area flows down, in the vicinity of the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), there are the game nail 2 and the flow of the game ball in the game area D30. A screw BS2, which is a part screwed onto the road and attaches the center decoration D38, is provided. In addition, the second area is provided with a ball return prevention member D39 and a screw BS3 which is a component screwed onto the game ball flow path in the game area D30 and attaches the ball return prevention member D39. The eaves portion D38-1 is configured to incline to the left and right with the vicinity of the screw BS1 shown in FIG. 40(a) as the apex. When a game ball is shot with the first area of the game area D30 as a target, the game ball shot to the game area D30 flows down to the left-hand hitting area or the right-hand hitting area. When it flows down to the left-handed area, it is a part that is screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, and on the screws BS1, BS2, etc. that attach the center decoration D38 (Z direction + direction of the Z axis, that is, Or, it flows down on the screw BS3, which is a part screwed into the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 and attaches the ball return prevention member D39. On the other hand, when it flows down to the right-handed area, it flows down on the screw BS11, which is a part screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 and attaches the center decoration D38.

Next, the lengths of the game balls, screws, and game nails will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the game board D35 in FIG. Here, screws BS1 to BS16, etc., which are parts to be screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 and which attach the game parts, have a length in the longitudinal direction of the screw ( total length) is A mm. Also, the length (diameter) of the game ball is B mm (11 mm in detail), the length of the game nail in the longitudinal direction (total length) is D mm (27 mm in detail), and the front surface of the game board D35 to the rear surface of the transparent plate D16. The length (distance) to the game board D35 (specifically, the game board) is E mm (specifically, 19 mm), and the length (thickness) of the game board D35 (specifically, the game board) is configured to be F mm. When the lengths of the screws are configured in this way, EA=C.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the length of the game nail that is not buried in the game board D35 and protruding is D1, and the length of the game nail that is buried (planted) in the game board D35 is D1. D2. Specifically, the longitudinal length (total length) of the game nail D is 27 mm, D1 is 18 mm, and D2 is 9 mm. 1/3 of the length (9 mm) is buried in the game board D35. In a situation where the game nail is normally driven into the game board D35 and installed, 18 mm of D1 protrudes from the game board D35. In other words, 18 mm or more, which is 2/3 of the total length of the game nail, 27 mm, protrudes from the game board D35. In addition, in a situation where the game nail is normally driven into the game board D35 and installed, it is not buried in the game board D35 and protrudes from E (19 mm), which is the length (distance) from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16. G (1 mm), which is the value (length) obtained by subtracting D1 (18 mm), which is the length of the game nail, is configured to be shorter than B (11 mm), which is the diameter of the game ball.

The length D (which may be D1) of the game nail in the longitudinal direction is configured to be longer than the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw. In other words, the length A in the longitudinal direction of the screw is configured to be shorter than the length D in the longitudinal direction of the game nail (which may be D1). Further, the number of screws installed in the game area D30 of the game board D35 is configured to be smaller than the number of game nails installed in the game area D30 of the game board D35. Furthermore, in the state where the game nail is driven into the game board D35, the length G shown in FIG. (The diameter B of the game ball is longer than the distance G between the game nail and the transparent plate D16). With this configuration, the game ball cannot pass between the game nail and the transparent plate D16, while the game ball can pass between the screw and the transparent plate D16, so that the intended game can be played. It becomes possible to design a sphere flow path.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the game ball is configured to flow down the mounting positions of the game parts, which are the positions where the screws BS1 to BS16 and the like on the game board surface are stopped. For example, when a game ball is shot aiming at the first area of the game area D30, the game ball shot to the game area D30 flows down to the left-hand hitting area or the right-hand hitting area. When it flows down to the left-handed area, it is a part that is screwed on the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30, and is on the screws BS1, BS2, etc. that attach the center decoration D38, and on the screw BS3 that attaches the ball return prevention member D39. flow up. On the other hand, when it flows down to the right-handed area, it flows down on the screw BS11, which is a part screwed onto the flow path of the game ball in the game area D30 and attaches the center decoration D38. Then, the falling game ball collides with or comes into contact with the screw BS1, screw BS2, screw BS3, screw BS11, etc. that attach game parts (center decoration D38, ball return prevention member D39, etc.) to the game board D35. may become loose. In this way, if the screw is loosened and the screw is not removed from the game part and the screw is loosened, the game balls overlap at the loosened portion of the screw and prevent the game ball from flowing down, a state called grape. This causes a problem that the player cannot play the game. In addition, if the player is unable to play the game, there is a problem that the interest in the game of the player is spoiled.

In order to solve such a problem, a first length, which is 1/3 of the length of the game nail in the longitudinal direction, is planted in the game board D35, and a screw is attached. 1/3 × A as the second length, which is 1/3 of the length of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction (the same ratio as the ratio at which the game nail is implanted), is In the state of being screwed into the game board (screwed state), 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35 and is self-supporting (hereinafter referred to as the protruding state). In the protruded state of FIG. 41 (c), C3=E as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3×A, which is the third length, from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16 -2/3×A is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. The length (total length) of the screw in the longitudinal direction is defined as A, but the total length of the screw is 15 pitches when expressed in terms of pitches, and 2/3 of A, which is the length in the longitudinal direction of the screw, is the game board. The state of (c) in FIG. 41 protruding from D35 is changed to a protruding state of 10 pitches. When comparing the game nail with a predetermined screw whose 1/3 length is screwed into the game board D35, the predetermined screw and the game nail provided closest to the predetermined screw are compared. may

In addition, a half portion of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35 (screwed state), and a half portion of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35. 1/2×A, which is half the length A of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, in the protruding state in which it protrudes and is independent from the game board D35. C2=E−1/2×A, which is the value obtained by subtracting , is configured to be greater than or equal to B, which is the diameter of the game ball. The length (total length) of the screw in the longitudinal direction is defined as A, but the total length of the screw is 15 pitches when expressed in terms of pitches. The protruding state may be an 8-pitch protruding state.

By configuring in this way, even if the screws attaching the game parts to the game board D35 are loosened to the point where they can stand on their own, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 can be maintained by the game ball. , the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game is not disabled, and the player's interest is reduced. can be prevented. The screws are BS1 to BS16, but in particular, the screw BS1 provided near the eaves D38-1 and the screw provided near the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) This is effective when BS2, the screw BS3 provided for attaching the ball return preventing member D39, and the screw BS11 provided for attaching the center ornament D38 are loosened.

With respect to the screw BS1 provided in the vicinity of the eaves D38-1, the inclined surface of the eaves D38-1 causes the game ball to flow down to the side of the transparent plate D16. Since the game ball can surely flow down, the structure is such that loosened screws do not hinder the flow of the game ball. In addition, a left-handed game ball passes through the screw BS2 provided near the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) and the screw BS3 provided for attaching the ball return prevention member D39. Because it is an area, it has a structure that does not hinder the flow of game balls due to loose screws. In addition, since the screw BS11 provided for attaching the center decoration D38 is an area through which the right-handed game ball must pass, the structure is such that the loosened screw does not hinder the flow of the game ball.

Here, there are a plurality of types of screws, and they are configured to have different lengths depending on the game part to be attached and the attachment position. The game parts are attached using screws corresponding to the game parts to be used and the attachment positions. For example, seven types of screws (screws 1 to 7) are used below, and the lengths A of screws 1 to 7 are set as follows. The length of C, the length of A+B, the relationship between A and B, and the relationship between B and C are also shown below.
(Screw 1) A = 10.2 mm, C = 8.8 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≤ B, C ≤ B
(Screw 2) A = 10.1 mm, C = 8.9 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≤ B, C ≤ B
(Screw 3) A=7.6 mm, C=11.4 mm, A+C=19 mm, A≦B, C≧B
(Screw 4) A=12.4mm, C=6.6mm, A+C=19mm, A≧B, C≦B
(Screw 5) A = 8.4 mm, C = 10.6 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≤ B, C ≤ B
(Screw 6) A = 9.4 mm, C = 9.6 mm, A + C = 19 mm, A ≤ B, C ≤ B
(Screw 7) A=10.3 mm, C=8.7 mm, A+C=19 mm, A≦B, C≦B

The relationship between the length A of the screw and the diameter B of the game ball is basically A≤B. The game parts are attached using such screws. Screws satisfying the relationship A≦B are used more than screws satisfying the relationship A≧B. In addition, the relationship between the diameters B and C of the game ball is basically C≤B, but at least one screw (for example, screw 3) that satisfies the relationship C≥B is provided, The game parts are attached using such screws. Screws satisfying the relationship C≦B are used more than screws satisfying the relationship C≧B. The number of screws (72) used in the game board D35 is less than the number of game nails (182) used in the game board D35, and the screw length A is the length of the game nail. It is constructed shorter than D.

Next, half of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35. 1/2×A, which is half the length A of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, in the protruding state in which it protrudes and is independent from the game board D35. , the length of 1/2*A+C2, the relationship between 1/2*A and B, and the relationship between B and C2 are shown below.
(Screw 1) 1/2×A=5.1 mm, C2=13.9 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 2) 1/2×A=5.1 mm, C2=13.9 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 3) 1/2×A=3.8 mm, C2=15.2 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 4) 1/2×A=6.2 mm, C2=12.8 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 5) 1/2×A=4.2 mm, C2=14.8 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 6) 1/2×A=4.7mm, C2=14.3mm, 1/2×A+C2=19mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B
(Screw 7) 1/2×A=5.2 mm, C2=13.8 mm, 1/2×A+C2=19 mm, 1/2×A≦B, C2≧B

1/2 × A ≤ B, that is, even if the screw is half loosened, the diameter of the game ball is longer than half the length of the screw, so the game ball does not flow down. Since it is not stopped by screws, the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 without being in a so-called grape state, so that the problem that the player cannot play the game can be solved. can be avoided. In addition, by configuring so that C2≧B, that is, by configuring so that the distance from the screw to the glass plate is longer than the diameter of the game ball even when the screw is half loosened, Since the flow of the ball is not stopped by screws, the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 without causing a so-called "grape" state, so that the player cannot play the game. You can avoid the problem of stuttering.

Next, the 1/3 portion of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and 2/2 of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35. In the projecting state where the part 3 projects and stands independently from the game board D35, the length E, which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, is 2/3 of the length A of the screw in the longitudinal direction. The length of C3, which is a value obtained by subtracting 2/3*A, the length of 2/3*A+C3, the relationship between 2/3*A and B, and the relationship between B and C3 are shown below.
(Screw 1) 2/3×A=6.8 mm, C3=12.2 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B
(Screw 2) 2/3×A=6.7 mm, C3=12.3 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B
(Screw 3) 2/3×A=5.1 mm, C3=13.9 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B
(Screw 4) 2/3×A=8.3 mm, C3=10.7 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≦B
(Screw 5) 2/3×A=5.6 mm, C3=13.4 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B
(Screw 6) 2/3×A=6.3 mm, C3=12.7 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B
(Screw 7) 2/3×A=6.9 mm, C3=12.1 mm, 2/3×A+C=19 mm, 2/3×A≦B, C3≧B

2/3×A≦B, that is, even if the screw is barely able to stand on its own, the diameter of the game ball is longer than 2/3 of the length of the screw, so the game ball flows down. is difficult to be stopped by a screw, and the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 without being in a so-called grape state, thereby avoiding the problem that the player cannot play the game. be able to. In addition, screws other than screw 4 should be configured so that C3≧B, that is, even if 2/3 of the length of the screw is loosened, the distance from the screw to the glass plate is the game ball. By making it longer than the diameter, it becomes difficult for the game ball to be stopped by screws, and the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 without being in a so-called grape state. It is possible to avoid the problem that the player becomes unable to play.

The right-handed area on the right side of the center of the game area D30 uses more screws than the left-handed area on the left side of the center of the game area D30. This is because the number of game parts is larger in the right-handed area, and the force of the game ball fired into the right-handed area is very strong. Therefore, by configuring in this way, it is possible to more firmly attach the game parts in the right-handed area to the game board D35. The number of screws used in the right-handed area may be smaller than that in the left-handed area. Furthermore, the right-handed area uses fewer game nails than the left-handed area, but the right-handed area uses more game nails than the left-handed area. It may be configured as

Further, the right-handed area may use more screws than the left-handed area, and the right-handed area may use fewer game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may use more screws than the left-handed area, and the right-handed area may use more game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may use fewer screws than the left-handed area, while the right-handed area may use more game nails than the left-handed area. Further, the right-handed area may use fewer screws than the left-handed area, and the right-handed area may use fewer game nails than the left-handed area.

In addition, the length of the screw in the right-handed area in the longitudinal direction is longer than the length of the screw in the left-handed area (the length of the screws in the right-handed area in the longitudinal direction is longer than the length of the screw in the left-handed area). The average length in the longitudinal direction of a plurality of screws in the left-handed area may be longer than the average length of the screws in the left-handed area. may be configured to be longer than the longitudinal length of ). This is because the momentum of the game ball shot to the right-handed area is so strong that it comes into contact with or comes into contact with the screw of the game part, and the screw is easily loosened. It becomes possible to more firmly attach the game parts in the area to the game board D35. Furthermore, as described above, the right-handed area uses more screws than the left-handed area, so that the game parts in the right-handed area can be more firmly attached to the game board D35. becomes possible. It should be noted that the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction may be longer in the right-handed area than in the left-handed area.

There are left-hand screws and right-hand screws. In particular, screws BS1 to BS3 and BS11 move in the rearward direction in the Z direction (Z direction - of the Z axis) when the screws are turned clockwise. It is preferred to use a forward right screw. Note that right-hand screws may also be used for screws provided at other positions. By using the right screw when attaching the game parts in the appropriate place to the game board in this way, when the game ball fired into the game area collides with the screw, force is likely to be applied in the clockwise direction, is the closing direction, it is possible to prevent the screw from loosening during the game.

Next, the ball return preventing member D39 in the game board D35 of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the game board D35 has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. A guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34 is formed on the game board D35. The guide rail D33 may be formed by the launch rail, part of the outer rail D32, and part of the inner rail D34. A ball return prevention member D39 having a prevention piece D39-1 for preventing the game ball that has flowed into the game area D30 from returning into the guide rail is provided near the exit of the guide rail D33. Specifically, a ball return prevention member D39 is provided at the tip of the inner rail D34.

The prevention piece D39-1 is swingably attached to the base D39-2, and as shown in FIG. 42(a), prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area D30 from returning into the guide rail. It is swingable between a second position (initial position) and a first position (guide position) capable of guiding the game ball launched into the game area D30. The prevention piece D39-1 is configured so as to swing rightward from the initial position to the guide position, but not swing leftward from the initial position and be restricted. That is, since it does not swing to the left from the initial position, it has a structure that can prevent the game ball guided to the game area from returning to the guide rail.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42(a), when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the prevention piece D39-1 faces upward (substantially vertically), and the tip thereof points toward the upper left. It is slanted from the top left to the bottom right, and has a sharp tip. By forming the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 so as to incline toward the upper left, as shown in FIG. 42(b), game balls are prevented from staying above the prevention piece D39-1. . Also, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the base D39-2 has a rounded portion on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1 so that the game ball does not stay on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. . In other words, when the prevention piece D39-1 is at the initial position, the prevention piece D39-1 faces upward, and the game ball is located above the prevention piece D39-1 and on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. are configured so that they do not accumulate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the distance from the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 to the outer rail D32 is L when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position. The prevention piece D39-1 is attached to the base D39-2 so that L is smaller than B, which is the diameter of the game ball (L<B). With this configuration, when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the game ball cannot pass above the prevention piece D39-1, so the game ball guided to the game area D30 is guided to the guide rail D33. You can prevent it from coming back. In FIG. 42(b), a line (one-dot chain line in the figure) extending from the left side surface of the prevention piece D39-1 is drawn, and the distance to the intersection with the outer rail D32 is L, but the prevention piece D39 It is preferable to set L to the shortest distance from the tip of -1 to the outer rail D32.

Also, as shown in (d) of FIG. 42, when the prevention piece D39-1 is in the initial position, the tip of the prevention piece D39-1 is formed to protrude to the right (game area side) (protruding portion form). With this configuration, even if the game ball collides with the game nail positioned on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1 and bounces back toward the prevention piece D39-1, the game ball is pushed to the guide rail by the projecting portion. You can prevent it from coming back.

Here, in a state in which a conventional ball return prevention member is provided in the game area, a situation may occur in which the shot game ball flows back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the game area, or the shot game ball may When flowing into the game area, the game ball may stay at the tip of the ball return prevention member, which hinders the subsequent flow of the game ball into the game area and the progress of the game. Therefore, it becomes one of the factors that impair the interest of the player in the game.

In order to solve such a problem, a game board D35 provided with a game area D30 in which game balls can flow down, a launching means (shooting device D42) for shooting game balls toward the game area, and a launching means A guide rail that guides the shot game ball to the game area D30, and a prevention piece D39-1 that is provided near the exit of the guide rail and prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area D30 from returning into the guide rail. The prevention piece is displaceable between a first position capable of guiding the shot game ball to the game area and a second position preventing the game ball flowing into the game area from returning into the guide rail. In the state where the piece is positioned at the second position, the prevention piece faces upward, and is configured so that the game ball does not stay on the right side of the prevention piece.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in the game area while preventing the shot game ball from flowing back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the game area.

Further, screws BS1 to BS3 are provided on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. Assuming that the screws BS1 to BS3 are loosened, countermeasures are configured as follows. 1/3×A as the second length, which is 1/3 of the length of A, which is the length of the screws BS1 to BS3 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. Then, when 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35, from E which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, the third length C3=E−2/3×A, which is the value obtained by subtracting 2/3×A, which is the diameter of the game ball, is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1 to BS3 are loosened, countermeasures assuming that half the length of the screws are loosened are configured as follows. A half length of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw protrudes from the game board D35 by 1/2×A. C2=E−1/2×A as a value obtained by subtracting 1/2×A, which is half the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the disc D35 to the transparent plate D16 is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the game part to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-sustaining state, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 is equal to the diameter of the game ball. Since the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board by configuring it to be larger (longer) than the game board, the game will not be in a state where it can not be played, preventing the player from losing interest. It becomes possible to

Next, referring to FIG. 43, which is a side view of the first main game starter A10 attached to the game board D35, the first main game starter entrance ball detection device A11s for the entrance of the first main game starter A10 will be described.

(a) of FIG. 43 shows a first main game start entrance detection device A11s, which is a ball entry sensor, when looking into the inside of the first main game start A10 from the entrance of the first main game start entrance A10. is in an invisible position. An example of the first main game starter A10 will be shown below, but it can also be applied to other winning openings.

First, the first main game start opening A10 includes an entrance into which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a flow path ( A channel 1 which is a guide channel) and a channel 2 which is a channel that bends backward at a bend angle 1 downstream of the channel 1 and is a channel (guide channel) in which a game ball flows backward. and a channel 3 which is a channel (guide channel) through which a game ball flows downward, and which is a channel that bends downward at a bend angle 2 downstream of the channel 2; and a first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s. Although the flow path 2 is shown as a horizontal flow path in the drawing, it is preferable that the flow path 2 be a flow path that slopes downward from the front to the rear.

The flow path 1 includes a front guiding flow path constituting part that is the front surface 1, a rear guiding flow path constituting part that is the rear surface 1, a left guiding flow path constituting part that is the left side, and a right side that is the right side. and a lower guide flow passage forming portion, which is the lower surface. It should be noted that the flow path 1 may be a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and may be a flow path that does not have any surface (a guiding flow path forming part), and may be a flow path that is circular or elliptical instead of rectangular. can be In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of front, rear, left, right, and bottom guide flow passage forming portions, which are arc-shaped guiding flow passage forming portions. Further, although the flow path 1 including the inlet is composed of one member, it may be composed of a plurality of members.

The flow path 2 includes a front guiding flow path forming part that is the front surface 1, a rear guiding flow path forming part that is the rear surface 2, a left guiding flow path forming part that is the left side, and a right guiding flow path forming part that is the right side. It is composed of a flow path forming part, an upper guide flow path forming part that is the upper surface, and a lower guide flow path forming part that is the lower surface. It should be noted that the flow path 2 may be a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and may be a flow path in which any surface (a guide flow path forming part) does not exist. can be In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of front, rear, left, right, upper, and lower guide flow passage forming portions, which are arc-shaped guiding flow passage forming portions. Further, although the channel 2 is configured separately from the channel 1, it may be configured integrally with the channel 1. FIG. Moreover, although the flow path 2 is composed of one member, it may be composed of a plurality of members.

The flow path 3 includes a front guiding flow path forming part that is the front surface 2, a rear guiding flow path forming part that is the rear surface 2, a left guiding flow path forming part that is the left side, and a right guiding flow path forming part that is the right side. It is composed of a flow path forming part and an upper guiding flow path forming part, which is the upper surface. It should be noted that the flow path 3 may be a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and may be a flow path that does not have any surface (a guiding flow path forming portion), or may be a flow path that is circular or elliptical instead of rectangular. can be In the case of a circular or elliptical flow path, it is composed of front, rear, left, right, and upper guide flow passage forming portions, which are arc-shaped guiding flow passage forming portions. Further, although the channel 3 is configured separately from the channel 2 , it may be configured integrally with the channel 2 . Moreover, although the flow path 3 is composed of one member, it may be composed of a plurality of members. Further, the channels 1 to 3 may be integrally constructed, or the channels 1 to 3 may be composed of a plurality of members.

Here, an arbitrary point of the entrance of the first main game starter A10 and an arbitrary point of the first main game starter entrance ball detection device A11s are connected with a straight line (two-dot chain lines 1 to 3 in the figure). In addition, in (a) of FIG. 43, an arbitrary point of the entrance of the first main game starter A10 is illustrated at the most forward position of the entrance, but it is not limited to this position, and constitutes the entrance. It may be at any position on the plane (in other words, the plane formed by the space through which the game ball can pass). In addition, for any part of the first main game start entrance detection device A11s, in (a) of FIG. 43, the most forward position (two-dot chain line 1), the most rearward position (two-dot chain line 2), and the position between the most forward direction and the most rearward direction (two-dot chain line 3), but are not limited to these positions. 1 It may be at any position on the surface in the entrance direction of the main game start entrance ball detection device A11s.

Then, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game starter A10 along the two-dot chain line 1 in FIG. 43(a), the first main game starts from the entrance of the first main game starter A10 The 1st main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is invisible due to the lower guide flow passage configuration part (lower surface) provided up to the entrance ball detection device A11s. Also, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start A10 along the two-dot chain line 2, from the entrance of the first main game start A10 to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s The first main game start entrance ball entry detection device A11s is made invisible by the rear side guide flow passage configuration part (rear surface 1) provided in the. Furthermore, even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game starter A10 along the two-dot chain line 3, from the entrance of the first main game starter A10 to the first main game starter entrance ball detection device A11s The first main game start entrance ball entry detection device A11s is made invisible by the lower guide flow passage configuration part (lower surface) provided in the . In this way, the straight line that connects an arbitrary point at the entrance of the first main game starter A10 and an arbitrary point of the first main game starter entrance ball detection device A11s, how to draw a straight line Also, since it collides with any one of the flow path 1, flow path 2 and flow path 3, from the entrance of the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port A10 The first main game start entrance detection device A11s, which is a ball entry sensor, is configured to be located at a position that is invisible to the player when looking into the inside.

Here, although it is not a straight line connecting an arbitrary point of the entrance of the first main game starter A10 and an arbitrary point of the first main game starter entrance detection device A11s, the first main game starter A10 A straight line (chain double-dashed line 4 in FIG. 43) connects the rearmost point of the inlet (the position of the rear surface 1) and the point of intersection between the rear surface 1 forming the channel 1 and the upper surface forming the channel 2. , Even if the player looks inside from the entrance of the first main game start A10 along the two-dot chain line 4, from the entrance of the first main game start A10 to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s The first main game start entrance ball entry detection device A11s is made invisible by the provided lower guide flow passage configuration part (lower surface).

In addition, the two-dot chain line 4 indicates the line when looking downward from the most rearward position of the entrance of the first main game start gate A10, but the position of the entrance is not limited to this position. (in other words, the surface formed by the space through which the game ball can pass) can be any position, and the two-dot chain line 4 is a line when looking downward from the position of the entrance Good to have.

Here, in the state where the first main game starter A10 is attached to the game board D35, the first main game starter entrance ball detection device A11s for detecting a game ball that has passed through the first main game starter A10 is used to play the game. If it is attached at a position visible to the player, the game ball attached with the fishing line is shot, and a prize ball is obtained by illegally entering the first main game start opening A10, or a special game is aimed. Such fraudulent acts are committed, which causes a problem in the game arcade.

In order to solve such a problem, a game board D35 provided with a game area D30 in which game balls can flow down, a transparent plate D16 provided in front of the game board D35, and a transparent plate D16 installed on the game board D35 A plurality of game nails, a first main game start opening A10 provided at a predetermined position of the game board D35 and capable of receiving a game ball, and a first main game start opening A10 provided on the flow path of the game ball. Predetermined screws screwed into the board, guide channels (channels 1 to 3) through which game balls entering the first main game start port A10 can flow down, and guide channels (eg, channel 3) A first main game start opening detection device A11s provided at a predetermined position and capable of detecting a game ball entering the first main game start opening A10; A guide flow passage configuration part that guides a game ball entering A10 in a direction different from the entering direction is provided, and a predetermined portion of the entrance of the first main game start port A10 A guide flow path forming portion forming a guide flow path is configured to intervene on a straight line connecting A11s with a predetermined point.

In addition, in the flow path from the entrance of the first main game start opening A10 to the first main game start entrance detection device A11s, at least 1 It is configured to have a curved angle (curved angle 1 in FIG. 43). Moreover, although the flow paths (flow paths 1, 2, and 3) provided with two bends are illustrated, the flow paths may have three or more bends.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent cheating such as shooting a game ball attached with a fishing line to obtain a prize ball by illegally entering the first main game start opening A10 or aiming at a special game. be able to.

Also, in the two-dot chain lines 1, 3, and 4, the first main game start entrance entrance ball detection device A11s becomes invisible from the entrance due to the lower surface (the lower guide flow path constituting part that constitutes the flow path 2). In the two-dot chain line 2, an example is shown in which the first main game start entrance entrance ball detection device A11s is invisible from the entrance due to the rear surface 1 (the rear side guide passage constituting part that constitutes the passage 1). Although shown, it is not limited to these surfaces (guidance flow passage configuration portion), but by a surface (guidance flow passage configuration portion) corresponding to the shape of the flow passage, the first main game start entrance entrance ball detection device A11s can be detected from the entrance. It is good if it is not visible. In addition, although an example in which the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is invisible from the entrance is shown by one surface (guidance flow path configuration part), two or more surfaces (guidance flow path configuration part ), the first main game starting entrance entrance ball detection device A11s may be configured to be invisible from the entrance.

Next, in (b) of FIG. 43, a game ball enters from the entrance of the first main game start port A10, and the entering game ball flows down through the flow path 1, the flow path 2, and the flow path 3. And, it is a diagram showing just before the game ball is detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s. An example of the first main game starter A10 will be shown below, but it can also be applied to other winning openings.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), a game ball entered from the entrance of the first main game start opening A10 flows down the flow path 1 downward. After that, when the game ball flows down to the bend angle 1, it flows backward at the bend angle 1 and flows down the flow path 2 as it is. After that, when the game ball flows down to the corner 2, it flows downward along the corner 2 and flows down the channel 3 as it is. In addition, the flow path 3 is provided with a first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, which is an entrance ball sensor having a ball entrance through which a game ball can pass. The ball is configured to be detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s.

Here, in the case of a flow path in which the flow speed of two game balls flowing down becomes very fast, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10 continuously There is a case where the two game balls that have flowed down are erroneously detected as one game ball.

In order to solve such erroneous detection of the game ball entering the first main game start port A10, as shown in FIG. Bending angle 2 just before the first main game starting entrance ball detection device A11s in the guidance flow path (paths 1 to 3) up to the start entrance detection device A11s (for example, the position where it turns from the flow path 2 to the flow path 3) to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is configured to be less than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In other words, K, which is the shortest length from the vertex of the corner 2, which is the closest turning angle to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, is the length of the game ball. A first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be shorter than B, which is the diameter. That is, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to satisfy the relationship of K<B.

The angle of the turn 2 (the angle formed by the flowing direction of the game ball in the channel 2 and the flowing direction of the game ball in the channel 3) is shown as a right angle, but it may be an acute angle or an obtuse angle. The shortest length from the main game start entrance ball detection device A11s to the apex of the nearest acute or obtuse turning angle 2 should be configured to be shorter than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In addition, it may be curved in an arc, and in this case, the shortest length from the first main game start entrance ball entry detection device A11s to the middle point of the nearest arc-shaped bend angle 2 is the diameter of the game ball. It suffices if it is configured to be shorter than a certain B. It should be noted that the flow path 3 may be a flow path that guides the game ball in a different direction (or a different angle) from the flowing direction of the game ball in the flow path 2 which is the flow path before the flow path 3 .

In addition, although the angle of the bending angle 1 (the angle formed by the flowing direction of the game ball in the channel 1 and the flowing direction of the game ball in the channel 2) is shown as a right angle, it may be an acute angle or an obtuse angle. It can be curved. It should be noted that the flow path 2 is in a direction ( Alternatively, any flow path may be used as long as it guides at different angles.

In addition, J, which is the distance from the upper surface of the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s facing the surface constituting the entrance where the game ball enters to the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s, is the game It is configured to be less than 2×B, which is the diameter of two spheres. In other words, the surface (guidance path forming part) forming the turn angle 2, which is the closest turning angle to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, and the game of the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s J, which is the shortest length from the upper surface, which is the surface facing the surface constituting the entrance where the ball enters, to the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s, is the diameter of two game balls 2 It is configured to provide the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s in the flow path 3 so as to be less than ×B. That is, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to satisfy the relationship of J<2×B.

By configuring in this way, by hitting the rear surface 2 (flow path forming part) of the flow path 3, the game ball is played with the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s in the state immediately after the game ball loses its momentum. A ball can be detected, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that two game balls are one. If J or K is made too long, the game ball will accelerate and reach the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s at a faster speed, and two game balls will become 1. It is supplemented that the possibility of false detection increases if there is one.

In the guide flow paths (flow paths 1 to 3) of FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), flow path 1 is a flow path in which game balls flow downward, and flow path 2 is a flow path in which game balls flow backward. Although the flow path 3 is a flow path in which the game ball flows downward, the flow path 1 is a flow path in which the game ball flows leftward, rightward, or backward. The flow path 2 may be a flow path in which the game ball flows downward, leftward, or rightward, and the flow path 3 may be a flow path in which the game ball flows leftward. , to the right, or to the rear.

For example, when the channel 1 is a channel that flows downward, the channels 2 and 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(2) The channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(3) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(4) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(5) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(6) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(7) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(8) Channel 2 is a channel that flows down rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows down leftward.

For example, when the flow path 1 flows backward, the flow paths 2 and 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(2) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(3) Channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(4) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(5) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(6) Channel 2 is a channel that flows down leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows down rightward.
(7) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(8) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(9) Channel 2 is a channel that flows down rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows down leftward.

For example, when the flow path 1 is a flow path that flows leftward, the flow paths 2 and 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(2) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(3) Channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(4) The channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(5) Channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(6) Channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(7) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(8) Channel 2 is a channel that flows rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(9) Channel 2 is a channel that flows down rightward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows down leftward.

For example, when the flow path 1 is a flow path that flows down in the right direction, the flow paths 2 and 3 are configured as follows.
(1) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(2) The channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(3) Channel 2 is a channel that flows downward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(4) The channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and the channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(5) Channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows leftward.
(6) Channel 2 is a channel that flows backward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows rightward.
(7) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows downward.
(8) Channel 2 is a channel that flows leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows backward.
(9) Channel 2 is a channel that flows down leftward, and channel 3 is a channel that flows down rightward.

Even if such flow path 1, flow path 2, and flow path 3 are configured, as shown in (b) of FIG. From the turning angle 2 (for example, the position where the flow path 2 turns to the flow path 3) just before the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s in the guidance flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) to the entrance detection device A11s 1 K, which is the distance to the main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, is configured to be less than B, which is the diameter of the game ball. In other words, K, which is the shortest length from the vertex of the corner 2, which is the closest turning angle to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, is the length of the game ball. A first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3 so as to be shorter than B, which is the diameter. That is, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to satisfy the relationship of K<B.

In addition, even if the flow path 1, the flow path 2, and the flow path 3 are configured as described above, the surface of the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s that constitutes the entrance where the game ball enters is facing. J, which is the distance from the top surface to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, is configured to be less than 2×B, which is the diameter of two game balls. In other words, the surface (guidance path forming part) forming the turn angle 2, which is the closest turning angle to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, and the game of the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s J, which is the shortest length from the upper surface, which is the surface facing the surface constituting the entrance where the ball enters, to the first main game start entrance ball entrance detection device A11s, is the diameter of two game balls 2 It is configured to provide the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s in the flow path 3 so as to be less than ×B. That is, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is arranged in the flow path 3 so as to satisfy the relationship of J<2×B.

It should be noted that the guide channels (channels 1 to 3) that flow leftward, rightward, and backward are preferably provided with a downward slope so that the game ball flows downstream of the channel. In addition, the guide flow path (flow paths 1 to 3) may be a flow path that guides the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 in a direction (or a different angle) different from the entering direction. , Even if the flow path (e.g., flow path 3) is in the same direction (or the same angle), the front flow path (e.g., flow path 2) is a flow path that guides in a different direction (or a different angle). Good luck. Moreover, although the flow paths (flow paths 1, 2, and 3) provided with two bends are illustrated, the flow paths may have three or more bends. Further, although the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is provided in the flow path 3, it may be provided in another flow path. Furthermore, although an example in which the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is provided horizontally has been shown, it may be configured to be provided vertically or inclined.

Further, screws BS9 and BS14 (see FIG. 40) are provided to attach the first main game starting port A10 to the game board D35. Assuming that the screws BS9 and BS14 are loosened, countermeasures are configured as follows. 1/3×A as a second length which is 1/3 which is a predetermined ratio of A which is the length of the screws BS9 and 14 in the longitudinal direction is screwed into the game board. Then, when 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35, from E which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, the third length C3=E−2/3×A, which is the value obtained by subtracting 2/3×A, which is the diameter of the game ball, is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS9 and BS14 are loosened, countermeasures assuming that half the length of the screws are loosened are configured as follows. A half length of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw protrudes from the game board D35 by 1/2×A. C2=E−1/2×A as a value obtained by subtracting 1/2×A, which is half the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the disc D35 to the transparent plate D16 is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

By configuring in this way, even if the screw attaching the first main game starter A10 to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-supporting state, the distance from the tip of the projecting screw to the transparent plate D16 is larger (longer) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game will not be disabled. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the game when the power supply is interrupted after the game ball is shot and then the power supply is resumed will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the power supply is interrupted after the game ball is shot, and then the power supply is resumed. Generally, in a normal game, a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42, and the shot game ball moves along the guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. Then, it is configured to reach the second area (it may be the first area) of the game area D30. Then, the game ball that has reached the second area collides with a plurality of game nails, an obstacle D48 that causes the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction, a windmill D49, and the like, and the "flowing route of the game ball" indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. ] and enter the first main game start port A10.

Here, after shooting a game ball, intentionally cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine, and then restart the power supply to acquire random numbers corresponding to the special game and aim for the special game. is a problem. In addition, an abnormal situation such as a momentary power failure (interruption of power supply) and recovery (restart of power supply) may occur due to some factor.

In order to solve such a problem, first, the case where the power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball is present at the position shown as "recovery from power failure 1" in FIG. 44 will be described. First, a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42. Timing at which the shot game ball is at a predetermined position (the position indicated as "electrical interruption" in FIG. 44) of the guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at , and the power turns off from on. Immediately after that, it is a position until the fired game ball reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (shown as "power failure recovery 1" in FIG. 44). The power supply is restarted at the timing at the position where the power is turned off, and the power is turned on. After that, the game ball passing through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) reaches the second area of the game area D30. Here, the second region is a region where a game ball that is fired with the weakest firing intensity that can reach the game region D30 reaches the game area D30 as the firing intensity of the shooting device D42.

The game ball that has reached the second area collides with a plurality of game nails and obstacles D48 that cause the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction, and a windmill D49, and flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. and enter the first main game start gate A10. However, at the timing when the game ball that entered the first main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the main program of the main control board M is not started, so the first Even if a game ball entered into the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is activated, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (ta described in FIG. 46) is the position until the game ball shot before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the game area with a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 as a starting point Than the time (t5) for the game ball to pass through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s after flowing down the "flowing route of the game ball" of D30 and entering the first main game start opening A10 It is designed to last for a long time. That is, it is configured to satisfy ta>t5.

Here, the position until the game ball shot before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the game is started from a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 t5 is the time from when the game ball flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the area D30 and enters the first main game start opening A10 until the game ball passes through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. , the time varies due to the effects of game nails, obstacles D48, and windmills D49. is configured to be In addition, when the game ball passes through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s after entering the warp entrance WP provided in the left area of the center decoration D38, or when a state called grape occurs, When the game ball passes through the 1 main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, it may not be ta>t5. That is, when the game ball flows down the left-handed area while the game is progressing normally, ta>t5 regardless of the flow-down route of the game ball.

Next, the case where the power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball is present at the position shown as "recovery from power interruption 2" in FIG. 44 will be described. First, a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42. Timing at which the shot game ball is at a predetermined position (the position indicated as "electrical interruption" in FIG. 44) of the guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at , and the power turns off from on. Immediately after that, the power supply at the timing at the predetermined position (the position indicated as "power failure recovery 2" in FIG. 44) immediately after the fired game ball passes through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) The supply is restarted and the power is turned on from off. After that, the game ball passing through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) reaches the second area of the game area D30. Here, the second region is a region where a game ball that is fired with the weakest firing intensity that can reach the game region D30 reaches the game area D30 as the firing intensity of the shooting device D42.

The game ball that has reached the second region collides with a plurality of game nails and obstacles D48 that cause the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction, and a windmill D49, and flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. and enter the first main game start gate A10. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not started at the timing when the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the first Even if a game ball entered into the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is activated, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (ta described in FIG. 46) is a game ball shot before the power supply is cut off, starting from a predetermined position at the timing when the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) is the starting point. is set to be longer than the time (t4) for the game ball to enter the first main game start opening A10 and pass through the first main game start opening detection device A11s. there is That is, it is configured to satisfy ta>t4.

Here, starting from a predetermined position at the timing when the game ball shot before the power supply is cut off passed the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), the "flowing route of the game ball" of the game area D30 ] and enters the first main game start opening A10, and t4, which is the time until the game ball passes through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s, includes game nails, obstacles D48, and windmills. Although the time varies due to the influence of D49, ta>t4 is established even when the maximum time when the "game ball flows down" is set to t4. In addition, when the game ball passes through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s after entering the warp entrance WP provided in the left area of the center decoration D38, or when a state called grape occurs, When the game ball passes through the ball detecting device A11s entering the main game starting port, ta>t4 may not be satisfied. That is, when the game ball flows down the left-handed area while the game is progressing normally, ta>t4 is established irrespective of the flow-down route of the game ball.

Here, since there is a relationship of t5>t4, in the case of "recovery from power failure 1", the following configuration is also possible. First, a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42. Timing at which the shot game ball is at a predetermined position (the position indicated as "electrical interruption" in FIG. 44) of the guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34. The power supply is cut off at , and the power turns off from on. Immediately after that, it is a position until the fired game ball reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and is a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 (shown as "power failure recovery 1" in FIG. 44). The power supply is restarted at the timing when the game ball exists at the specified position, and the power is turned on from off.After that, the game ball that has passed through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) is the second of the game area D30 Here, the second area is an area where a game ball that is shot with the weakest firing intensity that can reach the game area D30 reaches the second area.

The game ball that has reached the second region collides with a plurality of game nails and obstacles D48 that cause the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction, and a windmill D49, and flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. and enter the first main game start gate A10. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not started at the timing when the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the first Even if a game ball entered into the main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s, the entry is not detected.

That is, the time until the power supply is restarted, the main program of the main control board M is activated, and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (ta described in FIG. 46) , the launched game ball flows down the "flowing down route of the game ball" of the game area D30 starting from a predetermined position at the timing when the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) is passed, and the first main game It is configured to be longer than the time (t4) from entering the starting hole A10 until the game ball passes through the first main game starting hole entry detecting device A11s. That is, in the case of "recovery from power failure 1", it is configured to satisfy ta>t4.

By configuring in this way, fraud can be prevented. In addition, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first main game start gate A10, thereby preventing unintended disadvantages of the game hall.

It should be noted that the main program of the main control board M is activated and the game ball can be detected by the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, for example, timer interrupt processing after execution of step 1016 in FIG. may be executed.

In addition, the position until the game ball fired before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the predetermined position of the guide rail D33 is the starting point. The time from when the game ball flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the area D30 and enters the first main game start opening A10 until the game ball passes through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s is set to t5. However, the game ball shot before the power supply is cut off starts from a predetermined position on the shooting rail downstream of the guide rail D33 and flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the game area D30 to the first main. The time from entering the game start opening A10 until the game ball passes through the first main game start opening detection device A11s may be t6. Also in this case, it is configured to satisfy ta>t6.

Although the example of the first main game starter A10 has been shown, it can also be applied to other winning openings. It should be noted that the ball may be shot to reach the first area instead of the second area. It is sufficient if it is configured to flow down. In addition, although the number of game nails used in the game board D35 is 182, it is configured such that 117 game nails are provided in the left-handed area and 65 game nails are provided in the right-handed area. ing. It should be noted that the number of game nails is merely an example.

Further, screws BS1 to BS3 are provided on the right side of the prevention piece D39-1. Assuming that the screws BS1 to BS3 are loosened, countermeasures are configured as follows. 1/3×A as the second length, which is 1/3 of the length of A, which is the length of the screws BS1 to BS3 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. Then, when 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35, from E which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, the third length C3=E−2/3×A, which is the value obtained by subtracting 2/3×A, which is the diameter of the game ball, is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1 to BS3 are loosened, countermeasures assuming that half the length of the screws are loosened are configured as follows. A half length of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw protrudes from the game board D35 by 1/2×A. C2=E−1/2×A as a value obtained by subtracting 1/2×A, which is half the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the disc D35 to the transparent plate D16 is equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw that attaches the game part to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-supporting state, the distance from the tip of the protruding screw to the transparent plate D16 is the diameter of the game ball. , the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board, preventing the game from being disabled, thereby preventing the player from losing interest. It becomes possible to

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the power supply is cut off after the game ball is shot in the pachinko game machine equipped with the ball entry sensor and the discharge sensor. A game when positioned between the ball sensor and the ejection sensor will be described.

In recent years, a first main game start entrance detection device A11s as a ball entry sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a downstream of this first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s A pachinko game machine configured to match the number of game balls entering the first main game start port A10 with the number of game balls discharged has become widespread. there is In such a pachinko game machine, when the power supply is interrupted and then restarted, the passing of the game ball is detected only by the discharge sensor A12s without detecting the passing of the game ball by the entering sensor. Then, a mismatch error occurs in which the number of game balls entered and the number of game balls discharged do not match, resulting in a problem that the game cannot be played.

To solve this problem, configure as follows. First, a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42. A predetermined position of the guide rail D33 partitioned by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34 (for example, the position indicated as "power failure occurred" in FIG. 44) or At a predetermined position in the game area D30, such as the position of (a) in FIG. 45, the power supply is interrupted and the power is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the power supply is resumed at the timing when the game ball exists at a predetermined position between the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s and the discharge sensor A12s. turns from off to on. After that, the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s. However, since the main program of the main control board M is not started at the timing when the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s, even if the game ball passes through the discharge sensor A12s, the entering ball is not detected. ing. In other words, the power supply is interrupted during the time (ta described in FIG. 46) until the main program of the main control board M is activated and the game ball can be detected by the discharge sensor A12s. A predetermined position of the flow path 3 at the timing when the previously launched game ball passed the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (the game ball completely passed through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s It is configured to be longer than the time (t3) until the game ball passes through the ejection sensor A12s from the position immediately after the discharge sensor A12s. That is, it is configured to satisfy ta>t3. It should be noted that the timing at which the power supply is restarted and the timing at which the game ball passes through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s may be the same timing or different timings.

It should be noted that the time when the main program of the main control board M is activated and the game ball can be detected by the discharge sensor A12s may be, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed after the execution of step 1016 in FIG.

It should be noted that the launched game ball is located at a predetermined position of the guide rail D33 defined by a part of the outer rail D32 and a part of the inner rail D34 (for example, the position indicated as "power failure occurs" in FIG. 44). ), a predetermined position in the game area D30, and the position of (a) in FIG. It is sufficient if the power supply is interrupted before the ball is detected by the game start entrance detection device A11s. Also, the discharge sensor A12s was explained as being a discharge sensor corresponding only to the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, but it may function as a discharge sensor A12s corresponding to a plurality of winning openings.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the entry of balls into the ejection sensor A12s in the event of an abnormal situation. can prevent inconsistency with the number of

FIG. 46 shows the timing at which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is started, and the timing at which the game ball launched before the power supply is cut off is detected by the ball entry sensor after the power supply is started. It is a timing chart showing.

First of all, when the power supply to the pachinko machine is interrupted (the power supply is stopped), it means that the power switch of the pachinko machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, or the power supply is disconnected. It refers to a state in which a cable is disconnected, or a state in which the game center itself is out of power. In addition, cases such as when the power supply is unintentionally cut off at the game arcade are also included.

Power supply to the pachinko game machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the pachinko game machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply voltage level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply voltage level from time t2. In addition, in the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply voltage level is constant, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply voltage level may vary (randomly). ΔT1 is the time from the start of power supply until the level of power supply to the main control board M reaches the supply voltage level.

The main program executed on the main control board M starts at time ta when ΔT2 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this main program, the START (power-on) process of the main control board side main process shown in FIG. 5 is executed. In the processing of step 1016 in FIG. 5, the timer interrupt is permitted and the timer interrupt is activated. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is called and executed at predetermined intervals T. FIG. A cycle T for executing the timer interrupt is 4.0 msec. ΔT2 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply voltage level to when the main program of the main control board M starts up. Here, the relationship ΔT2>ΔT1 is established.

In addition, the starting point is a predetermined position of the flow path 3 at the timing when the game ball passes through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (starting point is the time t1 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine is started). The time when the game ball passes the sensor A12s is t3.

In addition, a predetermined position at the timing when the game ball shot before the power supply is cut off passes the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1) is the starting point (power supply to the pachinko game machine is started). Starting from time t1), the game ball flows down the “flowing route of the game ball” in the game area D30 and enters the first main game start opening A10, and the game ball passes through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. t4 is the time at which the

In addition, the position until the game ball fired before the power supply is cut off reaches the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and the starting point (pachinko game Starting from the time t1 when the power supply to the machine is started), the ball flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the game area D30, enters the first main game start port A10, and enters the first main game start port. The time when the game ball passes through the ball detection device A11s is t5.

In addition, the game ball fired before the power supply is cut off starts from a predetermined position on the launch rail downstream of the guide rail D33 (starting from the time t1 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine is started). The game ball flows down the "flowing route of the game ball" in the region D30, enters the first main game start opening A10, and passes through the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s at time t6.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the overlapping relationship between the game ball flowing down on the mounting portion D38-6 of the center ornament D38 and the mounting portion D38-6 will be described. (a) of FIG. 47 is a view showing a state in which a game ball flowing down on the attachment portion D38-6 located in the first area of the game area D30 (front side in FIG. 47) contacts the game nail 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44, the center decoration D38 is attached to the game board D35 by screwing screws, which are mounting fixtures, into mounting holes of a plurality of mounting portions D38-6 provided on the center decoration D38. is configured to The mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is configured to have an area larger than the area of the game ball when viewed from above, so that the game ball can flow down on the mounting portion D38-6. It is In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, the outer edge of the mounting portion D38-6 has a taper which is an inclined surface (an inclined surface descending toward the game area) in which the thickness of the mounting portion D38-6 gradually decreases toward the outside. A portion D38-5 is formed. The width of the tapered portion D38-5 is configured to be shorter than half the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is configured to protrude from the tapered portion D38-5 and flow down on the tapered portion D38-5. The game ball flowing down on the tapered portion D38-5 not only flows downward, but also moves in the front-rear direction (see the front and rear directions shown in FIG. 41) by contacting the taper portion D38-5. It is designed to flow downward while doing so. In addition, the center decoration D38 is provided with a wall portion D38-7 that partitions the game area D30. ) is a game area D30 where game balls can flow down, and the effect display device SG side (right side in the figure) is a non-game area where game balls cannot flow down.

FIG. 47(a) is on a straight line 1 of a dashed dotted line connecting the center of the game nail 1, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first area of the game area D30, and the center of the screw BS1. The center of the game ball is positioned at , and the game ball is in contact with the game nail 1 . In addition, in order to easily express the state in which the game nail and the game ball are in contact with each other, the game nail shows a cross section of the trunk portion of the game nail (see FIG. 41 for the trunk portion). In addition, the area of the game nail 1, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first area of the game area D30, is set to the normal firing strength that can reach the game area D30 as the firing strength of the shooting device D42. It is an area where the game ball fired at reaches, and it is also called a first recessed area through which the game ball can pass between the game nail 1 and the game nail located next to this game nail 1. be.

In this state, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is attached to the wall so that the length Ba, which is 50% or more of the diameter B of the game ball, overlaps the mounting portion D38-6. Starting from the part D38-7, it is on the game area D30 side and extends to the game nail 1 side, and Ba having a length of 50% or more of B, which is the diameter of the game ball, is attached to the mounting part D38-6. The game nail 1 is provided at a position Bb which is less than 50% of the diameter B of the game ball from the outer edge of the taper part D38-5 so as to be in an overlapping state.

By configuring in this way, not only can the game ball flow downward by the tapered portion D38-5 of the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 and the game nail 1, but also the forward and backward direction (the direction shown in FIG. 41) ), the motion of the game ball can be made irregular, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Although an example in which the movement of the game ball is made irregular by the attachment portion D38-6 in the first area and the game nail 1 is shown, the attachment portion D38-6 located in the second area shown in FIGS. , the taper portion D38-5, the wall portion D38-7, and the game nail 2 and the screw BS2, which are closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second area, are similarly constructed. 40 and 44, the mounting portion D38-6, the taper portion D38-5, the wall portion D38-7, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third region, and the continuous nail 1 The game nail and screw BS5 closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the third area are also configured in the same manner. The area of the game nail 2, which is the game nail closest to the attachment portion D38-6 located in the second area of the game area D30, has the weakest shooting intensity that can reach the game area D30 as the shooting intensity of the shooting device D42. It is an area where the game ball fired at , and is also called a second recessed area through which the game ball can pass between the game nail 2 and the game nail located next to this game nail 2. be.

FIG. 47(b) shows a game ball on a straight line 1 of a dashed dotted line connecting the center of the game nail 1, which is the game nail closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the first area, and the center of the screw BS1. It shows the state where the center is located and the game ball is in contact with the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38. In this state, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center ornament D38 is arranged such that B, which is the diameter of the game ball, overlaps the mounting portion D38-6 by 100% (completely overlaps) in a front view. is extended from the wall portion D38-7 to the game nail 1 side on the game area D30 side by the length of Bc. In other words, the mounting portion D38-6 of the center decoration D38 is extended toward the game nail 1 on the game area D30 side with the wall portion D38-7 as a base point so that Bc>B. In addition, the attachment portion D38-6 is configured so that the game ball is not positioned on the tapered portion D38-5 in this state. That is, the length obtained by subtracting the width of the tapered portion D38-5 from the length of Bc is configured to be longer than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

By configuring in this way, the game ball that collides with the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38 can flow down on the mounting portion D38-6 without protruding from the mounting portion D38-6. 41 (see the front and back directions shown in 41), instead of the irregular movement of the game ball flowing down while moving in the front and back direction, the game ball is made to flow down in a stable state without moving in the front and back direction. be able to. Therefore, when the game ball flows down along the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38, the game ball flows down stably, and is different from the irregular movement of the game ball flowing down on the tapered portion D38-5. Since the movement of the game ball can be shown to the player, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the purpose of the game nail is to improve the interest of the game by making the movement of the game ball irregular, it is possible to make the movement of the game ball irregular by the game nail and the mounting portion D38-6. On the other hand, the wall portion D38-7 of the center decoration D38 is intended to prevent game balls from flowing into the interior of the center decoration D38. It is constructed so as not to make the movement irregular.

Although an example of stabilizing the movement of the game ball by the mounting portion D38-6 in the first area and the wall portion D38-7 has been shown, the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second area shown in FIGS. , the wall portion D38-7, and the game nail 2 and the screw BS2, which are closest to the mounting portion D38-6 located in the second area, are constructed in the same manner. 40 and 44, the attachment portion D38-6, the wall portion D38-7, the attachment portion D38-6 and the continuous nail 1 located in the third region are located in the third region. The game nail and screw BS5 closest to the mounting portion D38-6 are similarly configured.

A large number of screws such as screws BS1, BS2, and BS5 are provided on the center decoration D38. Assuming that the screws BS1, BS2, BS5 are loosened, countermeasures are configured as follows. A state in which 1/3×A as the second length, which is 1/3 of the length of A, which is the length of the screws BS1, BS2, and BS5 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board. In the case where 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35, from E which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, the third C3=E−2/3×A as a value obtained by subtracting 2/3×A, which is the length of the ball, is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

Further, among the cases where the screws BS1, BS2, and BS5 are loosened, countermeasures assuming that half the length of the screws are loosened are configured as follows. A half length of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw protrudes from the game board D35 by 1/2×A. C2=E−1/2×A as a value obtained by subtracting 1/2×A, which is half the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the disc D35 to the transparent plate D16 is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw attaching the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-sustaining state, the distance from the tip of the projecting screw to the transparent plate D16 can be removed from the game ball. By configuring the game ball to be larger (longer) than the diameter, the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game will not be in a state where the game cannot be played, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, it will be described that the game ball can flow down without being retained even when some of the game nails that make up the chain nail have fallen out of the game board D35. FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is flowing down over the continuous nail 1 in a state in which the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 are not pulled out. In addition, in order to easily express the state in which the game nail and the game ball are in contact with each other, the game nail shows a cross section of the trunk portion of the game nail (see FIG. 41 for the trunk portion). The continuous nail may be composed of three or more game nails, but in FIG. A continuous nail 1 composed of four game nails is exemplified. The continuous nail 1 is provided in the third region and is composed of four game nails arranged substantially linearly in a direction inclined downward to the right with respect to the horizontal. A third game nail and a fourth game nail are planted in the game board D35 in this order. Note that, as shown in FIG. 44, the continuous nail 1 is the continuous nail positioned farthest to the left in front view among the continuous nails.

Regarding the arrangement of the game nails of the continuous nail 1 in the height direction (vertical direction) in the front view, the first game nail, the second game nail, the third game nail, the third game nail, and the third game nail are arranged from top to bottom in the game area D30. 4 game nails are arranged in order. That is, in front view, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the third game nail is provided at a higher position than the fourth game nail, and the second game nail is positioned higher than the third game nail. The first game nail is provided at a higher position than the second game nail. The height reference was the upper end of the body of each game nail, but the lower end of the body, the center of the body, the upper end of the head (see FIG. 41 for the head), the lower end of the head, and the head The center of the body (which is the same as the center of the body) may be used as a reference. In addition, "high" and "low" in the figure indicate the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the distance 1 between the first game nail and the second game nail, the distance 2 between the second game nail and the third game nail, and the third game nail and the fourth game nail is shorter than 1/2×B which is half of B which is the diameter of the game ball. Interval 1, interval 2, and interval 3 may be the same interval, or may be different intervals. Further, the interval 4 between the first game nail and the third game nail and the interval 5 between the second game nail and the fourth game nail are shorter than the diameter B of the game ball. . Note that the intervals 4 and 5 may be the same interval, or may be different intervals. The interval means the distance between the body of one game nail and the body of the other game nail.

Next, FIG. 48(c) is a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is flowing down over the continuous nail 1 in a state in which the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is pulled out. be. It will be explained that even when a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out in this way, the game ball can flow down without being retained. The second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is pulled out from the game board D35, and the first game nail, the third game nail, and the fourth game nail are not pulled out, and the game area. In the state provided at D30, when the game ball flows down over the continuous nail 1, especially when the game ball flows down over the first game nail and the third game nail, the center of the game ball is Positioned between the first game nail and the game ball of the third game nail, the game ball flows downstream after coming into contact with the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. It is designed to

Here, the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out of the game board D35, and the game ball is in the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. The first game nail and the third game nail are planted on the game board D35 so that the center of the game ball is higher than the upper end of the first game nail when in contact with the It is configured to In addition, the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out of the game board D35, and the game ball is placed between the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. , the left end of the first game nail is positioned to the left of the left end of the game ball, and the right end of the third game nail is positioned to the left of the right end of the game ball. 1 and a third game nail are planted on the game board D35. By constructing in this way, even when a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out due to repeated collisions of the game balls, the game balls flow down toward the first main game start port A10 without remaining. can be done. The right end of the fourth game nail is planted on the game board D35 so as to be located on the right side of the right end of the game ball.

In addition, the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 is in a state of being pulled out of the game board D35, and the game ball is placed between the body of the first game nail and the body of the third game nail. The first game nail and the third game nail are planted on the game board D35 so that the bottom of the game ball is higher than the lower end of the third game nail in the state of contacting the It is configured as follows. Here, the bottom of the game ball is the point where the upper and lower straight lines passing through the center of the game ball and the outer edge of the game ball intersect, as shown in FIG. 48(c). By constructing in this way, even when a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out, the game ball can flow down toward the first main game start opening A10 without remaining.

The first and third game nails are planted on the game board D35 so that the bottom of the game ball is positioned lower than the upper end of the third game nail. . Further, the first game nail and the third game nail are arranged so that the distance between the third game nail and the bottom of the game ball is shorter than the distance between the first game nail and the bottom of the game ball. are installed on the game board D35. By constructing in this way, even when a part of the continuous nail 1 is pulled out, the game ball can flow down without staying.

In this example, a state in which the second game nail among the game nails constituting the continuous nail 1 has been pulled out of the game board D35 has been described. The same relationship exists even when the game nail is removed from the game board D35 (for example, the same relationship occurs when the second game nail, the fourth game nail and the game ball are in contact). Further, the same relationship is obtained even if any of the game nails composing the continuous nail, except for both ends, is pulled out.

A screw BS5 is provided at the mounting portion D38-6 of the center ornament D38 closest to the continuous nail 1. As shown in FIG. Assuming that the screw BS5 is loosened, countermeasures are configured as follows. 1/3×A as a second length, which is 1/3 of a predetermined ratio of A, which is the length of the screw BS5 in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board, When 2/3×A as the third length of the screw protrudes from the game board D35, from E which is the length from the game board D35 to the transparent plate D16, the third length C3=E−2/3×A, which is a value obtained by subtracting a certain 2/3×A, is configured to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, among the cases where the screw BS5 is loosened, countermeasures assuming that half the length of the screw is loosened are configured as follows. A half length of A, which is the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, is screwed into the game board D35, and the screw protrudes from the game board D35 by 1/2×A. C2=E−1/2×A as a value obtained by subtracting 1/2×A, which is half the length of the screw in the longitudinal direction, from E, which is the length from the disc D35 to the transparent plate D16 is set to be equal to or larger than B, which is the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even if the screw attaching the center decoration D38 to the game board D35 is loosened in a self-sustaining state, the distance from the tip of the projecting screw to the transparent plate D16 can be removed from the game ball. By configuring the game ball to be larger (longer) than the diameter, the game ball can flow down (pass through) the game area D30 of the game board, so that the game will not be in a state where the game cannot be played, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be prevented.

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and the concepts listed below can be added to these concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments, as well as the combination and separation (higher-level concepts) of these concepts. may

Background technology of the pachinko machine (A1), currently the most popular pachinko machine, is triggered by a game ball entering the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main pattern) is displayed on the display part such as 7 segments game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, providing a game part such as a center decoration on the game board helps to improve the amusement of the game.

<<Configuration related to movable accessories>>
Next, a description will be given of the configuration related to the movable accessory applicable to the present specification, but the description will be omitted or simplified by assigning the same reference numerals to the same parts as in the above-described embodiment. do. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to each of the above-described embodiments.

49 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the game board of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 51 is a pachinko game according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the big winning gate device of the machine, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the big winning gate device according to the present embodiment, and (a) is a front view showing the internal structure of the big winning gate device. , (b) is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the big winning slot device. 53A and 53B are views showing the front cover and the first base portion of the big winning slot device according to the present embodiment, in which (a) is a front view of the front cover as seen from the back side, It is a front view of a base part. FIG. 54 is an image diagram for explaining a modification according to this embodiment.

<Schematic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment>
As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front frame D14 to which the game board is attached is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable. A door D18 having D24 and the like is attached so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed on the game board. This game area D30 includes a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10 provided substantially in the center of the lower part of the game area D30, and this first main game start opening. Two second main game start openings B12 and B13 (see FIG. 52) provided on the right side of the opening A10, a large winning opening device C50 having a large winning opening (first winning opening) C30, etc., approximately in the center of the game area D30 A performance display device SG having a display area over a range one size smaller than the game area D30, provided over the edge of the performance display device SG, and the outer peripheral surface of the game ball flowing down the game area D30. A center decoration (center frame) D38 that forms a part of the game area D30 by forming a path (divides the game area D30 and the display surface of the effect display device SG), is positioned above the game area D30, and provides an effect. A movable accessory device YK1 movable on the front side of the display device SG, a light guide plate unit DK including the light guide plate DK1 provided on the front side of the movable accessory device YK1, and below the first main game start port A10 It has an out port D36 and the like provided. It also has a firing handle D44 and a transparent plate D16 as in the previous embodiment.

<Internal structure of the big winning gate device C50>
Before explaining the big winning slot device C50, first, its internal structure will be explained. As shown in FIG. 52, the big winning opening device C50 is formed with a passage opening B15 through which game balls pass in the direction indicated by the arrow A at its upper right end, and an entrance opening in the direction indicated by the arrow B on the left side thereof. A gate B14 through which the ball (passes) is formed, and below the gate B14, the above-mentioned second main game start port B12 is formed. The second main game start opening B12 is opened and closed by the emergence and disappearance of a second shutter member C30c, which will be described later. On the left side of this gate B14, the above-described second main game start opening B13 is formed on the inclined surface C50A formed in the big winning opening device C50, and a ball can be entered in the direction indicated by the arrow C. . Of these game balls, the game balls that did not enter the second main game start port B13 flow down in the direction indicated by the arrow D and are collected at the out port D36 via the out passage OR1. ing. In addition, a large winning opening C30 is provided downstream of the passage opening B15 or the gate B14, and the large winning opening C30 is opened and closed by the emergence and disappearance of a first shutter member C30b, which will be described later.

Also, in the big winning hole device C50, a first path SR1 for guiding game balls that have passed through the passing hole B15 toward the big winning hole C30, and a second shutter member C30c are located at the retracted position, and the second main game When the starting port B12 is in an open state, the game ball that has passed through the gate B14 or the game ball that has flowed down through the first passage (channel) SR1 and entered the second main game starting port B12 is guided downward. When the second shutter member C30c is positioned at the closed position and the second main game start port B12 is in the closed state, the game ball or the gate B14 guided by the first path SR1 is passed through. A third passage (guiding passage) SR3 having a downwardly inclined fourth rib RB4, which guides the game ball toward the big winning opening C30, and is provided on the downstream side of the third passage SR3 to guide the game ball to the large winning opening C30. A branch passage SR4 having a prize winning passage portion S10 that guides to a prize winning port C30 and another passage portion S12 whose entrance S12a is provided upstream of the entrance S10a of the prize winning passage portion S10 and that guides game balls to an out port D36. and the downstream side of the first path SR1 and the downstream side of the gate B14 overlap each other, a confluence path SR5 is provided in which the game balls from the first path SR1 and the game balls that have passed through the gate B14 can join. .

<Overall Configuration of Big Winning Port Device C50>
Next, each configuration of the big winning slot device C50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the big winning opening device C50 has a front part C51 and a rear part C53 provided behind the front part C51. is fixed to the lower right portion of the (see FIG. 49). The front part C51 is responsible for part of the gauge configuration and design in the game area D30, and the back part C53 is inserted into an opening (not shown) formed in the game board, and a part of the opening is formed on the back of the game board. It is designed to protrude from

As shown in FIG. 51, the front part C51 is a flat plate-shaped member that is fixed to the surface of the game board by screwing, and an insertion hole C55A is formed in the central part thereof through which a ball passage part C30a, which will be described later, is inserted. a first base portion C55, a front cover C57 covering the first base portion C55 from the front side, a seal CL attached to the surface of the front cover C57, and the like. The front cover 57 has a flat body portion C57A and a peripheral wall portion C57B extending from the peripheral edge of the body portion C57A toward the first base portion C55. By covering the front surface of the first base portion C55 with the front cover C57, a predetermined internal space through which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can pass is formed. In addition, the front cover C57 is made of a resin such as a transparent plastic having optical transparency so that the internal space can be visually recognized from the outside. Visibility can be further improved by irradiating light from the LED unit C55B.

Furthermore, the sticker CL has a design portion CL1 with a design (design) such as a predetermined character or characters, and a design along the passages SR1 to 5 in order to make the passages SR1 to SR5 visible. It has a transparent portion CL2 made transparent in shape, and the player can visually recognize game balls passing through each of the paths SR1 to SR5 through this transparent portion CL2. The timing of illuminating the internal space by the LED unit C55B is, for example, the timing of the game state in which the game ball can pass through the internal space, such as during the above-mentioned right-handed game (for example, at the time of a big hit, time saving, etc.). Alternatively, the light may be emitted at all times, or the timing may be set when a game ball passing through the internal space is detected, and the timing can be set as appropriate.

Here, symbol YG in FIG. 53(b) is a game nail, and schematically shows the positional relationship between this game nail YG and the big winning opening device C50). As shown in FIG. 53(b), the upper end of the front cover C57 (in other words, the upper end of the big winning opening device C50) is close to a pair of game nails YG for guiding game balls to the gate B14 (for example, The gap between the game nail YG and the front cover C57 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the tip of the game nail YG, and if the game nail YG is bent toward the front cover C57 even a little, the game nail YG is bent. hits the front cover C57 to prevent further bending. That is, even if an attempt is made to hit the game nail YG using a tool to bend the game nail YG, the game nail YG and the front cover C57 are close to each other (in other words, when hitting the game nail YG, the tool cannot be used). and the front cover C57 are close to each other), the tool contacts the front cover C57 and the front cover C57 is easily damaged. It becomes difficult to hit with As a result, it is possible to prevent the game nail YG from being hit and bent with the above tool. By arranging the front cover C57 close to the game nail YG in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the game nail YG by cheating. In this embodiment, the front cover C57 is provided so as to be close to the game nail YG. By doing so, it may be made difficult to adjust the game nail. In short, the structures provided in the game area D30 such as the center decoration D38 and the front cover C57 described above are brought close to the game nail, or the shape of at least a part of the structure is extended to the vicinity of the game nail. The shape and arrangement of the structures should be such that they are close to the game nails, so that it is difficult to adjust the game nails.

The rear portion C53 has a second base portion C59 positioned on the rear side of the first base portion C55, a shutter driving unit 61, and the like. On the front side of the second base portion B59, there is a gate passing sensor C60a that detects a game ball passing through the gate B14, and a game ball that passes through the second main game start port B12 located below the gate passing sensor C60b. and a winning detection sensor C60c located on the left side of the gate passage sensor C60a and detecting a game ball passing through the second main game start opening B13 is attached, and the second base portion C59 A shutter drive unit C61 is attached to the rear side. The shutter driving unit C61 is provided so as to move forward and backward to a closed position for closing the big prize winning opening C30 and an open position for retracting from this closing position and opening the big winning prize opening C30 by driving a driving part such as a solenoid (not shown). A closed position for closing the second main game starting port B12 and an opening for opening the second main game starting port B12 after retreating from this closed position by driving a large winning opening shutter member C30b and a drive unit such as a solenoid (not shown). It has a starting opening shutter member C30c that can move back and forth to a position. A winning sensor (not shown) of the big winning opening C30 is provided inside the big winning opening C30.

<Configuration of front cover and first base portion B55>
As shown in FIG. 53(a), the upper end of the front cover C57 is formed with the above-described passage port B15, gate B14, and second main game start port B13. As shown in FIG. 53(a), on the back surface of the front cover C57, there are a first rib RB1 curved so as to smoothly guide the game ball passing through the passage B15 to the downstream side, and a first rib RB1. A second rib RB2 extending downward from the lower end, a third rib RB3 extending downward while facing the second rib RB2 with a gap larger than the game ball, and a downward slope from the upper end of the third rib RB3. and a horizontal portion rb1 extending substantially horizontally above the fourth rib RB4. A connecting portion rb3 having an abutting portion rb2 against which the game ball guided to the third passage SR3 collides downwardly to the right as viewed, and a downwardly inclined portion rb4 extending downwardly from the lower end of the connecting portion rb3. A fifth rib RB5, a sixth rib RB6 extending downward to the right of the third rib RB, and a seventh rib RB7 extending downward while facing the sixth rib RB6 with an interval larger than the game ball. A plurality of ribs for forming ball passages are provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the front cover C57 toward the first base portion C55. This protrusion amount is larger than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can pass through.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state where the front cover C57 covers the first base portion C55 (hereinafter simply referred to as “covered state”), the first rib RB1 and the back surface of the front cover C57 are , the portion corresponding to the upper side of the first rib RB1 and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion constitute the first passage portion SR1. In addition, in the covered state, among the second rib RB2, the third rib RB3, and the back surface of the front cover C57, a portion corresponding to between these second and third ribs RB2 and RB3 and a portion facing this portion A second passage portion SR2 is formed by the surface of the first base portion C55. Furthermore, in the covered state, the fourth rib RB4, the horizontal portion rb1 of the fifth rib RB5, the portion of the rear surface of the front cover C57 corresponding to the space between the fourth rib RB4 and the horizontal portion rb1, and the portion A third passage SR3 is configured with the facing surface of the first base portion C55. Further, in the covered state, among the sixth rib RB6, the seventh rib RB7, and the back surface of the front cover C57, a portion corresponding to between the sixth and seventh ribs RB6 and RB7 and a portion facing this portion The other passage portion S12 of the branch passage SR4 is formed together with the surface of the first base portion C55. Furthermore, in the covering state, the downwardly inclined portion rb4 of the fifth rib RB5, the first shutter member C30b in the closed position, and the back surface of the front cover C57 correspond to the downwardly inclined portion rb4 and the first shutter member C30b. A winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 is constituted by the portion where the winning portion is formed and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion. In the covered state, the second shutter member C30c in the closed position, the portion of the rear surface of the front cover C57 corresponding to the upper side of the second shutter member C30c, and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion and constitute the fifth passage SR5.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the third passage SR3 (passed through the third passage SR3) may be hit against the hitting portion rb2 with its momentum, and the game ball that hits the hitting portion rb2 The ball falls downward or bounces back depending on the momentum when it hits. An entrance S10a of the winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 is located below the hitting portion rb2, and an entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 of the branch passage SR4 is located upstream of the entrance S10a. is located. For this reason, the game ball that hits the hitting portion rb2 and falls downward flows into the winning passage portion S10. In addition, the game ball that hits the hitting portion rb2 and bounces back is directed to the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 located upstream of the entrance 10a of the winning passage portion S10, and enters the other passage portion S12 via the entrance S12a. may flow down. Furthermore, the game ball that hits the hitting portion rb2 and rebounds may hit the edge of the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12 and be rebounded to flow into the winning passage portion S10. Also, the game ball that hits the hitting part rb2 and bounces back may be returned to the third flow path SR3 again.

The first path SR1 is provided with a first deceleration section GS1 for decelerating (decreasing) the speed of the game ball passing through the first path SR1 by interfering with it. The first deceleration section GS1 is composed of rib-like protrusions C57a and C55a provided two each on the rear surface of the front cover C57 and the front surface of the first base portion C55 that constitute the first passage SR1. That is, the two projections C57a, 57a on the back surface of the front cover C57 that constitutes the first passage SR1 protrude toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and the projections on the surface of the first base portion C55 that constitute the first passage SR1 The two protrusions C55a protrude toward the rear surface of the front cover C57. These projections C55a and projections C57a are arranged alternately and spaced apart from each other. In addition, these projections C55a and C57a extend substantially perpendicularly to the curved first rib RB so that the game ball passing through the curved first passage SR1 hits (interferes) substantially perpendicularly. are arranged at different angles to each other.

The third path SR3 is also provided with a second deceleration section GS2 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the third path SR3. The second deceleration unit GS2 includes a rib-like protrusion C57b protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 forming the third passage SR3 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and and a rib-shaped protrusion C55b protruding toward the back surface of C57. The projection C57b is arranged above the tip of the fourth rib RB4 that forms the third passage SR3, and the projection C55b is arranged between the projection C57b and the second shutter member C30c. ing. Each of these protrusions C55b and C57b is also inclined downward so that a game ball passing through the third passage SR3, in other words, a game ball flowing down to roll on the fourth rib RB4 collides substantially vertically. It is arranged so as to extend in a direction perpendicular to the four ribs RB4.

Further, the fourth path SR4 is also provided with a third deceleration section GS3 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the fourth path SR4. The third deceleration unit GS3 includes three rib-like protrusions C57c protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 forming the fourth passage SR4 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and It is composed of four rib-like projections C55c projecting toward the rear surface of the front cover C57. These protrusions C57c and C55c are arranged at equal intervals and alternately with each other. These protrusions C57c and C55c are also inclined downward so that the game ball passing through the fourth passage SR4, in other words, the game ball flowing down so as to roll on the first shutter member C30b hits substantially vertically. It is arranged so as to extend in a substantially vertical direction with respect to the first shutter member C30b.

Furthermore, the fifth path SR5 is also provided with a fourth deceleration section GS4 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through the fifth path SR5. The fourth speed reduction portion GS4 includes a speed reduction recess C55d formed on the surface of the first base portion C55 that constitutes the fifth passage SR5, and a speed reduction recess C55d from the rear surface of the front cover C57 that constitutes the fifth passage SR5. and three rib-like protrusions C57d protruding toward the bottom surface. The deceleration recess C55d is formed on the surface of the first base portion C55, and is a recess in the shape of a substantially quadrangular truncated pyramid whose area on the bottom side is smaller than the area on the surface side. smaller than the outer diameter. In addition, the projections C57d of the fourth deceleration part GS are arranged in the left-right direction at substantially equal intervals, and the game balls passing through the fifth passage SR5, in other words, passing through the first passage SR1 to the left in FIG. It is arranged so as to extend in a substantially vertical direction so that a game ball thrown in the direction hits substantially vertically.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(a), at the side end of the big winning opening device C50, the ball flows down in the direction of the arrow D without entering the second main game starting opening 13. The above-mentioned out passage OR1 through which game balls pass is formed. The out passage OR1 is composed of an inclined passage portion SR14 inclined obliquely from the second main starting game port 13 and a vertical passage portion SR16 extending substantially vertically from the lower end of the inclined passage portion SR14. That is, in the covered state, an eighth rib RB8, which is downwardly inclined and serves as the bottom surface of the inclined passage portion SR14, is provided at the side end portion of the back surface side of the front cover C57, and the outside of the game ball is attached to the rib RB8. A ninth rib RB9 which is spaced apart by a distance larger than the diameter and substantially parallel to the rib RB8 and which serves as an upper surface portion of the inclined passage portion SR14; A tenth rib RB10'', which is the right side surface of the portion SR16, and an eleventh rib RB11, which extends downward from the lower end of the ninth rib RB9 and is the left side surface of the hanging passage portion SR16, are provided. These ribs are provided. RB8 to 11, a portion of the front cover C57 surrounded by these ribs RB8 to 11, and the surface of the first base portion C55 facing this portion form an out passage OR1. In the form, the eleventh rib RB11 is formed with a passage opening RB11a through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the out passage OR1 flows down toward the out opening D36 via the passage opening RB11a. It's becoming

This out path OR1 is also provided with a fifth deceleration section GS5 for decelerating the speed of the game ball passing through this out path OR1. The fifth speed reduction unit GS5 includes a rib-like protrusion C57e protruding from the back surface of the front cover C57 forming the out passage OR1 toward the surface of the first base portion C55, and three rib-like protrusions C55e protruding toward the back surface of the . The projections C55e provided in the inclined passage portion S14 are arranged in the eighth and ninth ribs RB8 and 9 forming the inclined passage portion S14 so that the game balls flowing down the out passage OR1 collide with each other substantially vertically. , and the protrusion C55e provided on the upper part of the hanging passage portion S16 extends substantially perpendicular to the tenth rib RB10, is the lower end portion of the hanging passage portion S16, and the game ball is shown in FIG. The projection C55e provided near the passage opening RB11a that passes through to the left side as viewed in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the passage port RB11a has an upper end at approximately the same height as the first shutter member C30b, and a lower end approximately at the same height as the lower end of the ball passage portion C30a. It is flat and has a shape that extends vertically. Therefore, the projection C55e provided near the passage opening RB11a is formed to be longer than the height direction of the passage opening RB11a (in other words, longer than the other projections C55e) and directed toward the passage opening RB11a. No matter where the game ball is, it can interfere with the projection C55e.

<Action of the large winning opening device C50 according to the present embodiment>
At the time of hitting to the right, the game ball flowing down the game area D30 and reaching the big winning opening device C50 flows down in the direction of arrow A or arrow B in FIG. , When the second main game start port B12 is in the closed state, it rolls on the second shutter member C30c closing the second main game start port B12 and heads toward the third passage SR3. Also, when the second main game start port B12 is in the open state, the player enters the second main game start port B12, or crosses the second main game start port B12 and heads for the third passage SR3. Further, when the game ball passes through the first path SR1 or the fifth path SR5, if the game ball interferes with any of the projections C55a, C57a, C55d or the deceleration recess 55d of the first or fourth deceleration section GS1, GS4 , the game ball flows down toward the downstream side in a state where its momentum is reduced.

Thus, by providing the first and fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4, the force of the game ball flowing down the first or fifth path SR1 or SR5 can be reduced, thus the second main game start port B12. is in the open state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second main game start port B12 as compared with the case where it is not decelerated by the first and fourth deceleration parts GS1 and GS4. In addition, by reducing the momentum of the game ball in the first and fourth deceleration units GS1 and GS4, the game ball becomes less likely to run wild and its behavior can be stabilized. As a result, the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the second main game start opening B12 is stabilized, and it is possible to prevent chattering and breakage of the winning detection sensor C60c that detects this game ball.

The game ball passing through the fifth path SR5 flows down along the third path SR3, and the game ball passing through the third path SR3 falls as it is or hits the hitting part rb2. When the game ball hits and bounces off the hitting portion rb enters the entrance S12a of the other passage portion S12, it flows down inside the other passage portion S12. In addition, when the game ball hits the hitting portion rb and rebounds does not enter due to hitting the peripheral edge of the entrance 12a of the other passage portion S12 or the like, it flows down inside the winning passage portion S10. While the game ball is passing through the third passage SR3, if the game ball interferes with the projections C55b, C55b of the second deceleration part GS2, the momentum of the game ball is lowered and the game ball moves toward the downstream side. flow down

Thus, by providing the second deceleration part GS2, the momentum of the game ball flowing down the third passage SR3 can be reduced, so that the game ball that has passed through the third passage SR3 can easily fall downward as it is. . In addition, even if it collides with the abutting portion rb2 in a state where the momentum is reduced, it is likely to fall downward as it is. Therefore, compared to the case where the game ball is not decelerated by the second deceleration part GS2, it is possible to make it easier to flow down the game ball to the prize winning passage portion S10 of the branch passage SR4 in which the big winning prize port 30 is located in the flow path. , It is possible to make it difficult to guide the game ball to the other passage part S12 that guides the game ball to the out port D36. As a result, in the branch passage SR4, the ratio of the game balls passing through the winning passage portion S10 can be made higher than the ratio of the game balls passing through the other passage portion S12, and the interest in the game can be enhanced without impairing the interest in the game. can be improved. Moreover, since the first or fourth reduction section GS1 or GS4 is provided upstream of the second reduction section GS2, after the momentum is reduced by the first or fourth reduction section GS1 or GS4 on the upstream side, the The momentum can be weakened by the second deceleration part GS2, and in this case, the proportion of game balls passing through the winning passage part S10 can be made higher than the proportion of game balls passing through the other passage part S12.

A game ball flowing down the winning path part S10 of the branch path SR4 via the third path SR3 enters the big winning opening C30 when the big winning opening C30 is in the open state, and the big winning opening C30 is in the closed state. , it rolls on the first shutter member C30b. At this time, if the game ball interferes with the projections C55c and C57d of the third deceleration section GS3, the game ball will flow down toward the downstream side in a state where the momentum is reduced.

Thus, by providing the third deceleration section GS3, the momentum of the game ball flowing down the winning path section S10 can be reduced, so that the rolling time of the game ball on the first shutter member C30b is lengthened. This makes it easier for the game ball to stay on the first shutter member C30b. As a result, at the time of a big hit, it is possible to easily generate so-called excess prize winning, such as entering more game balls than the prescribed number (for example, 9) of one round, and to improve the interest of the game. can be done. Here, as in the present embodiment, in a pachinko game machine equipped with a small hit rush, as described above, the small hit of the present embodiment is only one round, and compared to the big hit Since the opening time of the big winning hole C30 is short, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole C30 in one round of the small win is generally larger than the number of balls entering the big winning hole C30 in one round of the big win. will also be less. However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily generate excessive winning as described above. can be improved.

<Modified example of front cover C57 etc.>
In this embodiment, the upper end of the front cover C57 is brought close to the game nail YG. In addition to making the upper end transparent, as shown in FIG. 54(a), a plurality of grid lines may be attached to the upper end at regular intervals and perpendicular to each other. In this case, since the position of the game nail YG with respect to the board surface of the game board is clarified by the grid lines, as shown in FIG. ), the bent state is obvious at a glance, and this kind of fraudulent act can be prevented.

In the above example, the grid lines are attached directly to the front cover C57, but instead of this, for example, the grid lines may be attached to the relevant portion of the seal CL attached to the front cover C57. Also, the place where the grid lines are arranged is not limited to the front cover C57 as described above. Alternatively, grid lines may be directly attached to this portion, or a transparent seal having grid lines attached thereto may be attached to this portion, or grid lines may be attached to a portion corresponding to a game nail to be checked on the back side of the transparent plate 16. For example, a transparent seal with a line may be attached. In short, a mark such as a grid line may be attached to the front side of any game nail in the game area D30 as a reference for the position of the game nail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusions C55a, C57a, etc. of the deceleration sections SG1 to SG4 are formed in a rib shape, but the shape thereof is not limited to this, and an appropriate shape may be adopted. It is possible, and needless to say, the number and locations of these projections can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the projections C55a, C57a, etc. described above are formed to extend substantially perpendicularly to the front cover C57 and the first base portion C55. The distal end portion of C57a or the like may be formed so as to be inclined toward the upstream side or the downstream side from the proximal end portion thereof. In short, as long as it is possible to interfere with the flowing game balls, the shape, size, number, inclination angle, arrangement position, etc. can be appropriately set according to the specifications. Further, the location of the deceleration units SG1 to SG4 is not limited to the inside of the big winning opening device C50, and may be located at any location where deceleration is required in the path (channel) of the game ball.

<Configuration of Movable Accessory Device YK1>
Next, the movable accessory device YK1 will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing the movable accessory device YK1 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the logo accessory and the light guide plate of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment, FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing the drive section of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 60 is a front view for explaining the movable range of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to the present embodiment. 61 is a diagram for explaining a sensor for detecting the position of the logo accessory of the movable accessory device according to this embodiment and the detection state of this sensor, and FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial action processing for a role object, FIG. 63 is a perspective view for explaining the guide member of the movable role object device according to this embodiment, and FIG. It is an image figure explaining an effect|action.

As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory device YK1 is provided on the front side of the frame-shaped base YK3 and the frame-shaped base YK3, along the left and right vertical frame portions YK5 of the frame-shaped base YK3. a long plate-shaped movable base portion YK10 that can move up and down and extend to the left and right, and a long plate that is positioned on the front side of the movable base portion YK10 and that can move along the longitudinal direction of the movable base portion YK10 and extends to the left and right; It has a plate-shaped logo accessory (movable effect part) YK12 and the like. In addition, the logo accessory may be referred to as a movable accessory.

Decorative portions YK4 having designs such as characters and characters are provided on the front sides of the left and right vertical frame portions YK5 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3. In addition, in each of the vertical frame portions YK5, on the back side of each decorative portion YK4, a spiral shaft (slotted bolt) YK6 extends vertically between the upper and lower horizontal frame portions YK7 of the frame-shaped base portion YK3. is provided in

This frame-shaped base portion YK3 is provided on the back side of the center decoration (center frame) D38. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the transparent plate D16, the light guide plate DK1, the center decoration D38, and the movable accessory device YK1 are arranged in this order from the front side of the pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 56, the front surface of the logo accessory YK12 of the movable accessory device YK1 is positioned between the frontmost and rearmost sides of the center decoration D38 (in other words, both sides of the logo accessory YK12 and the inner surface of the center decoration D38) and close to the light guide plate DK1 (for example, close enough to interfere with the light guide plate DK1 when the logo accessory YK12 vibrates). It has become. The right diagram of FIG. 56 schematically shows the positional relationship, and the left diagram of FIG. 56 is simply shown to make it easy to understand from where in the right diagram the positional relationship is seen. (In the diagram on the left, descriptions of the logo accessories, etc. in the diagram on the right are omitted).

As shown in FIG. 57, both ends of the movable base YK10 are provided with threaded portions YK10a that are screwed to the pair of spiral shafts YK6 of the frame-shaped base YK3. By the rotation of the spiral shaft YK6 to which the power is transmitted from, the movable base portion YK10 moves up and down along the spiral shaft YK6. Further, an insertion hole YK10b having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front is formed in a portion of the movable base portion YK10 on the left side of the central portion thereof. In this embodiment, the movable base YK10 is vertically moved by the spiral shaft YK6 and the threaded portion YK10a. It goes without saying that the drive unit, the power transmission mechanism, and the like for vertically moving the movable base YK10 are not particularly limited.

The surface of the logo accessory YK12 attached to the movable base YK10 is decorated with a logo such as characters or letters of the pachinko game machine. An insertion piece (not shown) that is inserted into the insertion opening YK10b of the movable base YK10 is provided on the back surface of the logo accessory YK. As also shown in FIG. 58, this insertion piece is fixed to a rack gear RG1 provided on the rear side of the movable base YK10. The logo accessory YK12 moves left and right with respect to the movable base YK10.

Therefore, the insertion piece of the logo accessory YK12 can move until it hits the left end or the right end of the insertion hole YK10b of the movable base YK10 (in other words, the left end and the right end of the insertion hole YK10b are the logo accessory). A left stopper and a right stopper that prevent further movement of YK12), and the maximum position of the logo accessory YK12 with respect to the movable base YK10 is between the positions where the insertion piece abuts the left end or right end of the insertion hole YK10b. It has a movement range (maximum movable range). In the present embodiment, the logo accessory YK12 is located on the left side of the center decoration D38 that forms the inner partition of the substantially circular game area D30 in the left direction, as schematically shown by the broken line in FIG. In the right direction, they are movable to the right side of the center decoration D38, and the structure is such that the logo accessory YK12 can hit (interfere with) the center decoration D38.

In this embodiment, the maximum movement range of the logo accessory YK12 is the range to the left and right of the center decoration D38, but it is not limited to this. (left inner side of the center decoration D38), and in the right direction, the range to the left of the center decoration D38 (right inner side of the center decoration D38) may be set as the maximum movement range. In this case, when the logo accessory YK12 is positioned in the center in the vertical direction inside the center decoration D38 (for example, the position shown in FIG. 59(b)), it moves to the maximum in the horizontal direction. Even if it does, it cannot interfere with the center decoration D38, but the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. ), the inside diameter of the center decoration D38 in the horizontal direction is narrower at the upper portion than at the center portion in the vertical direction, so the logo accessory YK12 can be maximized in the horizontal direction. If it moves, it can interfere with the center decoration D38.

As shown in FIG. 57, the pinion gear PN1 described above is driven by a motor YK17 attached to a fixed base portion YK16 fixed to the frame-shaped base portion YK3 so as to rotate in the lateral direction (clockwise direction ( hereinafter simply referred to as "CW direction") and counterclockwise direction (hereinafter simply referred to as "CCW direction") In this embodiment, the motor TK17 is driven in the CCW direction. In this case, the logo character YK12 moves to the left, and when the motor YK17 is driven in the CW direction, the logo character YK12 moves to the right (see FIG. 61). In terms of form, the pinion gear PN1, the rack gear RG1, the motor YK17, the spiral shaft YK6, the threaded portion YK10a of the movable base YK10, and the like constitute a driving portion of the logo accessory YK12.

As shown in FIG. 58, the fixed base portion YK16 has a plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a prism-shaped rail RL1 extending in the left and right direction is provided on the surface side thereof. A YK12 rack gear GR1 to which a logo accessory YK12 is fixed via an insertion piece is attached so as to be movable in the horizontal direction along the rail RL1. Further, the fixed base portion YK16 is formed with a recessed groove YK16a along the rail RL1, and a detection piece GR1a protruding from the left end portion of the rack gear GR1 toward the fixed base portion YK16 is provided in the groove 16a. is inserted, and the detection piece GR1a moves left and right along the concave groove YK16a as the rack gear GR1 moves left and right.

A left movable position sensor SN1 for detecting that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned on the left side of the movable base YK10 is provided on the surface of the fixed base YK16 at a location corresponding to the left end of the rail RL1. , an initial position sensor SN2 for detecting that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the initial position along the right side from the left movable position sensor SN1, and the logo accessory YK12 is positioned on the right side of the movable base. A right movable position sensor SN3 for detecting that the logo accessory YK12 is movable, and a movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 for confirming the movable direction (either left or right) of the logo accessory YK12 are arranged in this order at intervals. Of these sensors SN1 to 4, sensors SN1 to SN3 are detected by the above-described detection piece GR1a, which detects the horizontal position of the logo accessory YK12 by putting these sensors SN1 to SN3 into the light blocking state and the light receiving state. As for the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4, the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 detects the movable direction of the logo accessory YK12 by setting the sensor SN4 to the light blocking state and the light receiving state. That is, in this embodiment, the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 functions as a detection piece that is detected by the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4.

The left movable position sensor SN1 uses a photosensor having a light-emitting element HK and a light-receiving element JK arranged above and below the recessed groove YK16a. Further, the initial position sensor SN2 and the right position sensor SN3 also use photosensors having a light emitting element and a light receiving element like the left movable position sensor SN1 described above. On the other hand, the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 includes a light emitting element (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the hook member FK through which the right end of the rack gear GR1 can pass, and a light emitting element (not shown) on the surface of the fixed base YK16. A photosensor having a light receiving element provided at a position corresponding to is used. In this embodiment, the photosensors as described above are used as the sensors SN1 to SN4. Needless to say, a sensor capable of detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 may be used. It goes without saying that the same applies to other sensors in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the logo accessory YK12 is located at the initial position, which is the upper part and substantially the center position of the frame-shaped base part YK3, in the normal state. 59(c), it is positioned at the movable position below the frame-shaped base portion YK3. Further, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and (c), the logo accessory YK12 moves left and right while falling from the initial position toward the movable position (lowest position). . Regarding the position of the logo accessory YK12, for example, the position shown in FIG. 59(c) is the initial position in the normal state, and the positions shown in FIGS. may be the movable position, and the game state corresponding to the above-mentioned initial position and movable position may of course be the normal time, the time of the small winning rush, the time of the big winning, the time of reach, etc. . In short, in which game state, the position of the logo accessory YK 12 can be changed as appropriate, and the logo accessory can be set in a predetermined game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state, jackpot game State (simply referred to as "jackpot".), small hit game state (simply referred to as "small hit".), game state with the time saving flag of the main game on, reach state, etc.) may be located at a predetermined position (either up, down, left, or right) corresponding to . Furthermore, the logo accessory YK12 can be made movable at the timings of (a) to (n2) in FIG. 168 . By configuring in this way, various actions of the first and second decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device SG are further emphasized, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the logo accessory YK12 performs the performance action, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the left movable position shown in FIG. and the right movable position shown in FIG. 59(c). In this embodiment, the movement of the logo accessory YK12 in the left-right direction during the production operation is performed at the left movable position shown in FIG. This is the leftmost position, and the right movable position shown in FIG. 59(c), in other words, the state detected by the right movable position sensor SN3, is the leftmost position. . That is, as described above, the logo accessory YK12 can move to the left of the center decoration D38 in the left direction and to the right of the center decoration D38 in the right direction. When performing the action, it is positioned to the right of the center decoration D38 at the left movable position, and to the left of the center decoration D38 at the right movable position. The object moves left and right within the range of the left movable position and the right movable position.

Note that the logo accessory YK12 in the present embodiment can be directed, for example, to move downward together with the movable base YK10, move left and right with respect to the movable base YK12, or return to the initial position shown in FIG. 59(a). At some point, when the movable base YK10 makes a slight reciprocating motion to the left and right (right and left rattling motion), or the movable base YK10 makes a slight reciprocating motion up and down, the logo accessory YK12 is displayed. For example, it can be made to appear to reciprocate up and down (rattling up and down), but the production action is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that the timing of the action can be set as appropriate. .

Further, the logo accessory YK12 can be moved up and down by the movable base YK10 and can be moved left and right with respect to the movable base YK10. It can be moved left and right by the movable base YK10 and can be moved up and down with respect to the movable base YK10, or it can be moved in an arc. In the section YK10, the moving direction is not particularly limited as long as it can move within the center decoration D38. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the logo accessory YK12 is used as the movable effect part, but instead of this, for example, a movable effect display device (in this case, the size is The size of the logo accessory YK12 of the present embodiment or smaller is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the movable range.), and the light guide plate DK1 described later, etc. Needless to say, it can be appropriately applied according to the specifications of the game machine.

<Detection of logo accessory YK12>
Next, detection of the logo character YK by the sensors SN1 to SN4 described above will be described. In this embodiment, when the detection piece GR1a of the rack gear GR1 to which the logo accessory YK12 is fixed and the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 light-shield any one of the sensors SN1 to SN4, the logo accessory YK12 is applied to that sensor. When the sensor SN1 to SN4 is in a light-receiving state in which the detection strip GR1a does not block light from any of the sensors SN1 to SN4, the sensor SN1 to SN4 detects the logo character YK12. It is considered as a non-detection state where it is not detected. Needless to say, the detection state and the non-detection state may be set such that the light shielding state is the non-detection state and the light reception state is the non-detection state. In short, if it is possible to determine where the logo accessory YK 12 is, it is possible to appropriately set the location of the sensor and whether the light shielding state or light receiving state of the sensor should be the detection state or the non-detection state. It is possible.

Here, the light blocking state and light receiving state of the detection piece GR1a and the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 for each sensor will be described. FIG. 61(a) is a diagram schematically showing the positional relationship of the sensors SN1 to SN4 for detecting the logo accessory YK12 provided on the movable base YK10, and FIG. 61(b) is a diagram where the logo accessory YK12 is fixed. FIG. 10C is a view showing the movement range of the detection piece GR1a of the rack gear GR1, FIG. and a state of being positioned at the right movable position.

FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing the movement range of the detection piece GR1a in the horizontal direction (in other words, the movement range of the logo accessory YK12 in the horizontal direction) as described above. The movement range in the horizontal direction is divided into sections (1) to (9). That is, the moving range of the detection piece GR1a in the left-right direction is the position where the detection piece GR1a hits the left end (left stopper) of the recessed groove YK16a (see FIG. 58) of the fixed base portion YK16 (in other words, the leftward movement range). The position of the maximum movement range.At this time, the left movable position sensor SN1 is in a light-shielded state and the logo accessory YK12 is positioned to the left of the left movable position. The movable position sensor SN1 is in a light blocking state, and the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the left movable position shown in FIG. 61(d). to just before passing the left movable position sensor SN1, the section (3) in which the detection piece GR1a moves from the final position of this section (2) to the position before the initial position sensor SN2, and the detection piece GR1a moves from Section (4), in which the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1 moves from the final position of this section (3) to the position where the initial position sensor SN2 is shielded from the light, is moved to the position just before the movement direction confirmation sensor SN4 is shielded from the light. GR1a has moved slightly to the right from the final position of this section (4) (At this time, the initial position sensor SN2 is in a light-shielded state, and the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. 61(a). ), and the position where the right end 1b of the rack gear GR1 shields the movement direction confirmation sensor SN4 (in the subsequent sections (6) to (9), the movement direction confirmation sensor SN4 continues to maintain the light shielding state). section (5) where the detection piece GR1a moves from the final position of this section (5) to just before passing the initial position sensor SN2, section (6) where the detection piece GR1a moves to the right from the final position of this section (6) In the section (7) in which it moved to just before the movable position sensor SN3, the detection piece GR1a moved slightly to the right from the final position of this section (7) (at this time, the right movable position sensor SN3 is at the light shielding position, The logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the right movable position shown in FIG. It is divided into nine sections such as section (9) up to the position where it hits (in other words, the position of the maximum movement range in the right direction).

Further, in each of the sections (1) to (9), the detection conditions of the sensors SN1 to SN4 are as shown in FIG. 61(c). That is, in section (1), only the left movable position sensor SN1 is in the detection state (the left movable position sensor SN1 is in a light-shielded state by the detection piece GR1a), the initial position sensor SN2, the right movable position sensor SN3, and the movable direction position sensor SN4. are in a non-detection state (the respective sensors SN2 to SN3 are in a light-receiving state in which light is not blocked by the detection piece GR1a or the right end portion GR1b of the rack gear GR1). Also in the section (2), the detection pattern is such that only the left movable position sensor SN1 is in the detection state, and in these sections (1) and (2), it is detected that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the left movable position. It is in a state of being In section (3), all sensors SN1 to SN4 are in a non-detection state, and the sensors SN1 to 4 cannot grasp where the logo accessory YK12 is. By being in the non-detection state, it is possible to grasp that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned to the left of the initial position.

Further, in the section (4), only the initial position sensor SN3 is in the detection state, and in sections (5) and (6), the initial position sensor SN3 and the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 are in the detection state. In these sections (5) to (6), it is detected that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at the initial position. In the section (7), the detection pattern is such that only the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is in the detection state, and the other sensors SN1 to SN3 cannot grasp where the logo accessory YK12 is, but the movement direction confirmation is in the detection state. The sensor SN4 is in a state where it can be grasped that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned to the right of the initial position.

Furthermore, in sections (8) and (9), the detection pattern is such that the right movable position sensor SN3 and the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 are in the detection state. It is in a state of detecting that it is positioned at the movable position.

Here, in the above sections (3) and (7), the left movable position sensor SN1, the initial position sensor SN1, and the right movable position sensor SN3 are all in the non-detection state. , the location of the logo accessory YK12 cannot be accurately grasped. However, in the section (7), the right movable position sensor SN4 is in the detection state as described above, and it can be understood that the logo accessory YK12 is positioned to the right of the initial position. Correspondingly, in the section (3), since the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is in a non-detecting state, in this state, the logo accessory YK12 is positioned to the left of the initial position. can be grasped. That is, the detection/non-detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to SN4 in section (3) is "x, x, x, x", while the detection/non-detection pattern of each sensor SN1 to 4 in section (7) is The pattern is "x, x, x, o", and the respective detection patterns are different. Even in the non-detection state, it is possible to grasp the approximate position of the logo accessory TK12 (whether it is to the left or to the right of the initial position). In other words, in this embodiment, when all the sensors SN1 to SN4 are in the non-detection state, the logo character (movable character) YK12 is positioned to the left of the initial position (all sensors are in the non-detection state). It is determined (determined) that it is located at a predetermined position corresponding to the event.

By providing the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 in this way, even if the sensors SN1 to SN3 for detecting the position of the logo character YK12 are all in a non-detection state, the approximate position of the logo character YK can be grasped. be able to. In addition, since the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 can grasp the approximate position of the logo character YK, all the sensors SN1 to SN3 that detect the position of the logo character YK are not in a non-detection state. Since there is no need to provide many sensors of this type, lengthen the length of the detection piece 1a, or increase the number of detection pieces, the number of parts can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide more sensors than necessary, it is possible to prevent complication of control due to an increase in the number of sensors.

Next, the initial operation processing (returning to the initial position) of the logo accessory YK12 by the sub control board (which is also the drive control unit) S will be described. In this embodiment, in the sub-control board S, when the position check for confirming the position of the logo character YK 12 is performed at the turning point of the game such as during the customer waiting demonstration, at the time of the big win, at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, etc., the logo role is checked. When the object YK12 is not in the initial position (initial position sensor SN3 is in a non-detection state) even after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed in a situation where the object YK12 should be at the initial position (for example, normal state). , and at the time of recovery from a power failure, initial operation processing of the logo accessory YK12 as shown in FIG. 62 is performed.

That is, the sub control board S first determines whether the logo character YK12 is positioned in any of the sections (4) to (6) (at any of the initial positions) based on the detection patterns of the sensors SN1 to SN4. However, if the logo character YK12 is not at the initial position (No at step 3551), it is determined whether the logo character YK12 is at the left position. If it is determined that the logo character YK12 is positioned at the left end position, in other words, that the logo character YK12 is positioned in the section (1) or (2) according to the detection patterns of the sensors SN1 to SN4 (Yes in step 3552). ), the sub-control board S calculates the first step number of the motor YK 17 required from the section (1) or (2) to the initial position (for example, to the section (4); the same applies hereinafter), and adjusts the motor by this value. A command to drive YK 17 in the CW direction (request for operation of logo accessory YK) is determined. Upon receipt of this command, the motor YK17 drives the predetermined number of steps in the CW direction, thereby moving the logo accessory YK12 rightward and returning to the initial position (step 3553).

Further, when the logo accessory YK12 is not at the left end position (NO in step 3552), the sub-control board S detects the logo accessory YK12 at the right end position, in other words, according to the detection patterns of the sensors SN1 to SN4, the section If it is determined that the logo accessory YK12 is located at (8) or (9) (Yes at step 3554), the sub control board S is required from section (8) or (9) to the initial position. A second step number of the motor YK17 is calculated, and a command to drive the motor YK17 in the CCW direction by this value is determined. Upon receipt of this command, the motor YK17 drives the predetermined number of steps in the CCW direction, thereby moving the logo character YK12 leftward and returning to the initial position (step 3555). In this embodiment, if the logo accessory YK12 is positioned in any of the sections (4) to (6), it is treated as being positioned in the initial position. In sections (5) and (6), which are in the detection state and are located slightly to the right of the initial position, the right end position may be determined, and the same control as in step 3555 may be performed. In this case, deviation of the initial position can be prevented, and fine adjustment of the initial position can be performed.

Also in step 3554, if the logo accessory YK12 is not positioned at the right end position, that is, according to the determination results so far, the logo accessory YK12 is not positioned at the initial position, the left end position, or the right end position. In this case, the sub control board S determines whether or not the logo accessory YK12 is outside the sensor (toward the left). If it is determined that the logo character YK12 is outside the sensor (toward the left), in other words, that the logo character YK12 is located in the section (3) according to the detection patterns of the sensors SN1 to SN4 (Yes in step 3557). , the sub-control board S calculates the third step number of the motor YK17 required from section (3) to the initial position, and determines a command to drive the motor YK17 in the CW direction by this value. Upon receipt of this command, the motor YK17 drives the predetermined number of steps in the CW direction, thereby moving the logo accessory YK12 rightward and returning to the initial position (step 3557).

On the other hand, if the logo character YK12 is not outside the sensor (toward the left) (No in step 3556), the logo character YK12 is outside the sensor (toward the right). Since the logo accessory YK12 is positioned at (7), the sub-control board S calculates the number of fourth steps of the motor YK17 required from section (7) to the initial position, and this value A command to drive the motor YK17 in the CCW direction is determined. Upon receipt of this command, the motor YK17 drives the predetermined number of steps in the CCW direction, thereby moving the logo character YK12 leftward and returning to the initial position (step 3558). In the above-described embodiment, when the logo accessory YK12 is returned to the initial position, the motor YK17 is driven by the required number of steps from the staying section to the initial position. Instead of calculating the number of steps, it goes without saying that the motor YK17 may continue to be driven until the initial position sensor SN3 detects the detection piece GR1a.

Here, when the movable direction confirmation sensor SN4 is not provided as in the present embodiment, each of the sensors SN1 to SN3 for detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 is detected as in the above-described sections (3) and (7). cannot detect its position and cannot grasp its approximate position, for example, the logo function YK12 is moved leftward or rightward by the above-mentioned maximum movement range, and the logo function YK12 After ensuring that the YK 12 is positioned at one of the left and right ends, control is required to return it to the initial position from there. In this case, since the movement distance of the logo accessory YK12 is long, the time required for returning to the initial position is also long, and the driving time of the motor YK17 is also long (situation 1). On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the movable direction position sensor SN4 is provided, the sensors SN1 to SN3 for detecting the position of the logo accessory YK12 cannot detect the position when performing the initial operation process. Even so, it is possible to grasp whether it is leftward or rightward from the initial position, and it is sufficient to drive the motor YK17 by the shortest distance from that position to the initial position. It can be returned to the initial position in the shortest time, and the load on the motor YK17 can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, when the logo accessory YK12 moves by the maximum movement range, the logo accessory YK12 interferes with the center decoration D38 as described above. When the logo accessory YK12 is moved by the maximum movement range when performing the initial operation process, depending on the operation status (vertical position) of the movable base YK10, the logo accessory YK12 may interfere with the center decoration D38. In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to move the logo accessory YK12 within the maximum movement range as described above, so such a situation can be prevented. As a result, when setting the movable range of the logo accessory YK12 with respect to the movable base YK10, it is not necessary to consider interference with the center decoration D38, so that the degree of freedom in designing the movable range can be improved. .

Next, the guide member of the movable accessory device YK1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, a guide member YK20 projecting toward the movable base YK10 is provided on the front side of the right end of the movable base YK10. A facing surface YK20a of the guide member YK20, which faces the movable base YK10, has a tapered surface YK20b whose thickness gradually decreases from the middle to the bottom in the vertical direction. , the tapered surface portion YK20b contacts the right end portion of the front surface of the movable base portion YK10 which is about to return to the initial position, thereby pushing the movable base portion YK10 back in the rear direction.

That is, as schematically shown in FIG. 64, the movable base YK10 located below the guide member YK20 is at the initial position (the height at which the logo accessory YK12 is located inside the upper end of the center decoration (center frame) D38). When raised to return, the right end of the movable base YK10 slides along the tapered surface YK20b by contacting the tapered surface YK20b of the guide member YK20. As a result, the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10, which have returned to their initial positions, are pressed and held in the rear direction. In the present embodiment, the guide member YK20 is in contact with the right end of the front surface of the movable base YK10, but the present invention is not limited to this. The contact may be made to the left end or the like. In short, the contact position is not particularly limited as long as it avoids the logo accessory YK12 on the front surface of the movable base YK10. Also, if the guide member YK20 cannot be brought into contact with any of the front surfaces of the movable base YK10 due to installation space issues, the guide member YK20 may be brought into contact with the front surface of the logo accessory YK12 or the like. It is preferable that the front surface of the movable base portion YK10 is in contact with the guide member YK20, although the effect is obtained.

By providing the guide member YK20 as described above, the guide member YK20 presses the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10 toward the back side at the initial positions of the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10. , the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10 can be stably positioned at the initial positions. Moreover, as in the present embodiment, the logo accessory YK12 and the light guide plate DK1 are in close proximity to each other (see FIG. 56), and the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10 are arranged in the horizontal and vertical directions as described above. It is possible to prevent the logo accessory YK12 from interfering with the light guide plate DK1 even if a performance action such as rattling action is performed.

<<Configuration on the back side of the movable accessory>>
Next, the configuration of the back side of the movable character applicable to this specification will be described in detail below. The configuration described in detail below can be applied to any shape of movable accessory that can be positioned on the front side of the effect display device SG. In addition, in the embodiments described in detail below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to other embodiments.

First, FIG. 65 is a front side and back side view of a part of the movable accessory device YK1 that the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has. 57, which is a part of the movable accessory device YK1 described above with reference to FIG. 57, illustrates the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10. The logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10 (the portion of the movable accessory device YK1 shown in FIG. 65) may be collectively referred to as a movable accessory.

<Front side surface portion YK30>
First, (a) in the upper part of the figure shows the front side of the movable accessory. In the figure, the front side of the movable accessory as viewed from the player (the portion that can be visually recognized when viewed from the front) is called the front side. On the front side of the movable accessory, the logo accessory YK12 and the movable base YK10 are mainly visible. In addition, the movable base YK10 has a plurality of lightable character object lamps YK21, which are lit during the initial operation after the power is turned on and during the production operation (sometimes referred to as the execution of the character object production). is configured as follows. The movable accessory according to the present embodiment has a case where it is driven as an initial action after the power is turned on, and a case where it is driven as a role production (drawing action) corresponding to the execution of pattern variation. The lighting pattern of the role product lamp YK21 that can be executed as a role product production may be configured not to be executed as a role product production, and the lighting pattern of the role product lamp YK21 that can be executed as an initial operation may be configured to be executed as a role product production. may be configured to obtain

A combination of "lighting/flashing/lighting out" or a combination of "lighting/lighting out" of the accessory lamp YK21 may be referred to as a lighting pattern. Specifically, the following may be referred to as a lighting pattern.
(1) A combination of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of multiple lamps at a certain timing (2) The pattern of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of one lamp that changes in chronological order (3) Time sequence of multiple lamps The pattern of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing that changes with the above (1) to (3) may not include blinking.

Also, the front side of the logo accessory YK12 (the front side surface portion YK30 corresponding to the logo accessory YK12) may be configured to have a plurality of accessory lamps YK21. A plurality of countersunk screws YK22 for fixing various members of the movable accessory are used on the front side of the movable base YK10 (front surface YK30 corresponding to the movable base YK10). The details of the countersunk screw YK22 will be described later.

<Back surface YK40>
Next, (b) at the bottom of the figure shows the back side of the movable accessory. In the figure, the back side of the movable accessory seen from the player (the part that cannot be seen when viewed from the front) is called the back side.

The entire surface portion illustrated in (b) is referred to as the back surface portion YK40. In other words, the back surface portion YK40 is a surface portion on the opposite side of the front surface portion YK30, and faces the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. A motor YK17 is provided on the back side of the movable accessory. In addition, a plurality of countersunk screws YK22 for fixing various members of the movable accessory are used on the back surface YK40 corresponding to the movable base YK10 and the back surface YK40 corresponding to the logo accessory YK12.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 60, when the logo character YK12 operates (initial operation after power-on or execution of character production), the effect display device SG displays It is configured to have a timing located in front of the region SG10. When the logo character YK12 is positioned in front of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the player cannot visually recognize the display area SG10 positioned behind the logo character YK12. Also, there is a possibility that the light emitted by the game effect lamp D26 or the like may be reflected on the back surface portion YK40 and reflected in the effect display device SG.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the back surface portion YK40 is the color of the display area SG10 in a situation where the effect display device SG is not displaying (such as a situation in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine) (when the player sees from the front). It is a color similar to (or substantially the same as) black, which is the visual color when visually recognizing. It should be noted that the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG may display black even in a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine (such a case is considered to be displaying black). You may call it not performing the display). By configuring in this way, even when the movable accessory moves in front of the effect display device SG in a situation where the effect display device SG is displaying in black (or a situation in which it is not displaying), , it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being reflected on the effect display device SG, and the light emitted by the game effect lamp D26 is reflected on the back surface portion YK40, thereby reducing the visibility of the display in the display area SG10. It is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by the driving of the movable accessory.

The color of the back surface portion YK40 may be configured as follows.
(1) A color similar to the color of the display region SG10 (2) A color similar or similar to the color of the display region SG10 (3) A color similar to the color of the display region SG10 covers more than half of the surface area (4) A color similar or similar to the color of the display region SG10 occupies half or more of the surface area. In this way, among the colors of the back surface portion YK40, the color that occupies the largest area (assuming that it is composed of a plurality of colors, but if there is only one color, the color of the entire back surface portion YK40 ) should be as described above.

Although not shown, not only the logo accessory YK12 but also the movable base YK10 may be positioned in front of the display area SG of the effect display device SG. Since the surface portion YK40 is also black, the light emitted from the effect display device SG and the game effect lamp D26 is reflected on the back surface portion YK40 even when the movable accessory moves, similarly to the logo accessory YK12. This makes it difficult to lower the visibility of the display in the display area SG10, and can prevent the player from being stressed by the driving of the movable role.

Further, as described above, when the logo character YK12 operates (initial operation after power-on or execution of character production), it is positioned in front of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. Therefore, it is preferable to configure so that the logo character YK12 that operates does not come into contact with the display area SG10.

Here, although not shown, inside the movable base YK10, there is a character lamp substrate on which predetermined electronic components are mounted for lighting the character lamp YK21. , or double-sided mounting), and the accessory lamp board has a connector (which may have a plurality of connectors). The accessory lamp substrate is configured not to protrude from the back surface portion YK40, and the accessory lamp YK21 is configured not to protrude from the back surface portion YK40. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs when the movable role is operated, the role product lamp substrate or connector of the movable role will come into contact with the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. It is possible to prevent the situation, and even if the game machine is transported to the game hall, the vibration during transportation may cause the character lamp substrate or connector of the movable character and the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. contact can be prevented.

In recent years, movable accessories provided in game machines have a cantilever structure (for example, a structure supported by one arm provided on the right side of the effect display device SG in a front view is called a cantilever). In many cases, it is a cantilevered movable accessory, and the movable accessory swings back and forth due to an abnormality in the drive mechanism, and the movable accessory lamp board and connector of the movable accessory and the production. Occurrences of contact with the display region SG10 of the display device SG are increasing. Here, the above-described configuration can also be applied to a movable accessory configured as a cantilever. By constructing so as not to protrude from the YK40, even in the case of a movable accessory configured as a cantilever, the situation in which the accessory lamp substrate or connector of the movable accessory comes into contact with the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is prevented. can be prevented. Note that the movable accessory that is cantilevered may be referred to as a movable accessory that is cantilevered from one of the left and right sides of the effect display device SG.

Also, the back surface portion YK40 may be configured to be substantially planar. More specifically, the maximum step height (sometimes referred to as the length in the height direction) of the back surface portion YK40 may be shorter than the radius of the game ball or the thickness of the game medal. (sometimes referred to as the length in the thickness direction), or may be shorter than the distance between the movable accessory and the display area SG10. As an example, the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm.

In addition, although not shown, the back surface portion YK40 is configured so as not to have transparency, and from the outside of the back surface portion YK40, the accessory lamp substrate and the connector cannot be seen (or cannot be seen). difficult).

<Flat screw>
Next, FIG. 66 is an example of a screw used in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. (a) is a countersunk screw YK22. The countersunk screw YK22 has a flat upper surface and is configured so that the head (screw head) does not protrude from the ground surface (in FIG. 66, the countersunk screw YK22 Although the upper surface of the screw YK22 and the ground surface are flush with each other, the upper surface of the countersunk screw YK22 may be lower than the ground surface). It is used for the movable accessory described above, and is configured so as not to protrude from the front surface portion YK30 and the back surface portion YK40. It is possible to prevent contact with the display area SG10 of the display device SG.

<Pan head screw>
Next, (b) of FIG. 66 is a pan head screw, which is a screw whose head (screw head) has a shape similar to the bottom of a pot, and is configured so that the head protrudes from the ground surface. It is

In addition, when a screw such as a round head screw whose head shape is a curved shape with a small radius R is used for a movable accessory, the light output from the effect display device SG is discolored and reflected by the head of the curved shape. However, there is a possibility that it will be reflected on the effect display device SG. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by using countersunk screws YK22 for all the screws used for the movable accessories, it is possible to prevent a situation in which discolored light is reflected in the effect display device SG.

In addition, in order to prevent irregular reflection of light by the screws used in the movable parts, the countersunk screws YK22 used in the movable parts may be black-plated screws such as black chromate plating. preferred.

Further, all the screws attached to the game board are countersunk screws YK22, or the number of countersunk screws YK22 may be larger than that of pan screws. Note that the screw BS1 described above in FIG. 47 and the like is also a countersunk screw. In this way, by using countersunk screws instead of pan head screws in areas where game balls can flow down, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the flow down of game balls.

<<Configuration of effect display device SG>>
Next, the configuration of the effect display device SG applicable to the present specification will be described in detail below. In addition, in the embodiments described in detail below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to other embodiments.

<Display area SG10>
The display area SG10 of the performance display device SG of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment is a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) liquid crystal display. Note that TFT is a thin film transistor. Further, all the configurations of the liquid crystal display described below are applicable to the display region SG10.

<Structure of TFT liquid crystal display>
First, the outline of the structure of the TFT liquid crystal display will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In FIG. 67, it is assumed that the backlight is illuminated from the upper side to the lower side, and the line of sight of the player is from the lower side to the upper side.

The role of each component is explained in detail. A polarizing filter can control the incoming and outgoing light. The glass substrate then prevents electricity from leaking out. Next, the transparent electrode is an electrode for driving the liquid crystal display, and is preferably made of a highly transparent material so as not to interfere with the display. Next, the alignment film is a film for aligning the molecules of the liquid crystal layer in a certain direction. Next, the color filter is for displaying colors, and has three color filters of R (red), G (green), and B (blue).

Next, the display mechanism of the TFT liquid crystal display will be described in detail. Light emitted from the backlight passes through a polarizing filter, so that only part of the light (light having an amplitude component in a specific direction) passes through, and the light that has passed through reaches the liquid crystal layer.

Here, the two alignment films have linear grooves, and the directions of the grooves of the two alignment films are different by 90 degrees. By having the grooves, the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal layer are arranged along the grooves. Since the directions of the grooves of the two alignment films are different by 90 degrees, when no voltage is applied between the transparent electrodes, the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal layer are twisted by 90 degrees from one alignment film to the other alignment film. will be arranged as follows. In this state, when the light emitted from the backlight reaches the liquid crystal layer, the light is twisted 90 degrees along the gaps between the liquid crystal molecules and can pass through the polarizing filter in front of the liquid crystal layer. .

On the other hand, when a voltage is applied between the transparent electrodes, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are aligned in the vertical direction (along the electric field). In this state, when the light emitted from the backlight reaches the liquid crystal layer, the light travels straight along the gaps between the liquid crystal molecules and cannot pass through the polarizing filter beyond the liquid crystal layer.

The display area SG10 has a configuration that can adjust whether or not light can pass through the polarizing filter by applying or not applying the voltage described above, corresponding to each of the color filters R, G, and B. there is Because of this configuration, for example, the light directed toward the color filter R is allowed to pass through the polarizing filter, and the light directed toward the color filter G and the color filter B is not allowed to pass through the polarizing filter. The liquid crystal display corresponding to filter G and color filter B will be displayed in red, and the light directed to color filter G will pass through the polarizing filter, and the light directed to color filter R and color filter B will pass through the polarizing filter. By not doing so, the liquid crystal display corresponding to color filter R, color filter G, and color filter B will be displayed in green, and the light directed to color filter B will pass through the polarizing filter, and color filter R and color filter G. By not allowing the light directed to pass through the polarizing filter, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the color filter R, the color filter G, and the color filter B is displayed in blue.

Further, as an example, the light directed to the color filters R and B is allowed to pass through the polarizing filters, and the light directed to the color filters G is not allowed to pass through the polarizing filters. A liquid crystal display that supports , will be displayed in a purple color that is a mixture of red and blue.

Thus, by combining the passage of light through the color filters R, G, and B, various colors can be displayed on the liquid crystal display. Such a combination of color filter R, color filter G, and color filter B is sometimes referred to as one pixel or one pixel. A combination of three filters, color filter R, color filter G, and color filter B, may be one pixel (one pixel), or a predetermined combination of color filter R, color filter G, and color filter B (filter (a combination of the number and arrangement of the pixels) may be set as one pixel (one pixel).

In addition, the light directed toward the color filter R and the color filter B is transmitted to display purple, and the color filter near the color filter transmits the light directed toward the color filter R to display red. , purple and red are mixed in appearance, and a color in which red is stronger than purple can be expressed. In this way, by increasing the number of filters per pixel, it is possible to express a wider variety of display colors.

As described above, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG in this embodiment is a TFT liquid crystal display, and has a predetermined number of pixels (for example, 10 million) (a predetermined number of pixels are arranged). is being used).

Also, the colors displayed on the liquid crystal display corresponding to one pixel can be expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue. In other words, it can also be expressed by how many red, green, and blue elements are included. For example, the brightness of red, green, and blue can be expressed in 256 levels from 0 to 255, respectively. As a specific example, (255,0,0) is red, (0,255,0) is green, (0,0,255) is blue, (0,0,0) is black, (255,255, 255) becomes white. That is, it can be represented in order of R, G, and B from the left. Thus, the displayed color is black when each of the R, G, and B elements is minimum, and the displayed color is white when each of the R, G, and B elements is minimum. When representing the color displayed on the liquid crystal display like (0, 0, 0), the leftmost number is the value of R, the value corresponding to R, the value corresponding to red, the color filter R The second number from the left is sometimes referred to as the value of G, the value corresponding to G, the value corresponding to green, the value corresponding to the color filter G, etc. The numbers on the right are sometimes referred to as the value of B, the value corresponding to B, the value corresponding to blue, the value corresponding to color filter B, and the like. In addition, as in (255, 0, 0), the brightness of red, green, and blue is expressed in 256 levels from 0 to 255, respectively, and is sometimes referred to as RGB gradation value.

<Standby demo screen>
Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a standby demonstration screen on the effect display device SG. The standby demo screen is a moving image that informs the player that the symbol variation is not being executed (the game is not progressing). A game machine that can be newly played can be notified, contributing to the improvement of the operation rate. Note that the standby demonstration screen may be referred to as standby demonstration, standby demonstration effect, standby demonstration display, demo screen, demonstration effect, demonstration display, and the like. The state in which the standby demo screen is displayed may be referred to as a waiting state, and the state in which the main game symbols are fluctuating may be referred to as a playing state.

In addition, when the state in which no new pattern variation is executed and no new suspension occurs for a predetermined period of time after the losing symbols have stopped and the suspension does not exist, the standby demonstration screen is displayed. will be displayed. It should be noted that when the big winning pattern (or small winning pattern) stops, the demonstration screen is not displayed after that even if there is no hold, and the big winning starts (or the small winning starts). becomes. In addition, when the losing pattern is stopped and there is a hold, after the fluctuation fixing time has elapsed, a new pattern fluctuation will start, and on the other hand, the big winning pattern (or small winning pattern) will stop, In addition, when there is a hold, the execution of the big win (or the execution of the small win) is started after the elapse of the variable fixed time.

<Standby demo screen display image>
Next, FIG. 68 shows a standby screen display image. This figure shows an example of the case where the standby demo screen is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

In addition, in FIG. 4(a), the main game symbols are changing, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. A background image or the like is also displayed in the display area SG10, and various colors are used in the display area SG10. In addition, as described above, the display area SG10 is a TFT liquid crystal display.

Next, in the same figure (b), the variation of the main game symbols is completed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. Also, the background image is continuously displayed. Since there is no hold, timer measurement for display of the standby demonstration screen starts at the timing shown in FIG. 8(b).

Next, a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) related to the standby demo screen has elapsed without any new suspension from the timing of FIG. ), the standby demonstration screen starts to be displayed on the effect display device SG in FIG. In this embodiment, the standby demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the main game symbols are stopped. good. As an example, when 60 seconds elapse from the state where the main game symbols are stopped and no suspension occurs, and no new suspension occurs, the first standby state is entered. In the first standby state, an image of a decorative pattern (for example, a character image attached to the decorative pattern) performing an action such as shaking, an image relating to volume adjustment, an image relating to light amount adjustment, etc. are displayed in the display area SG10. be done. When 120 seconds (180 seconds from the stop of the main game symbols) have passed since the first standby state, the second standby state is entered. In the second standby state, the standby demonstration screen is displayed, and the decoration pattern is hidden (the suspended image is also hidden).

Returning to the description of FIG. 68, in FIG. 68(c), the standby demonstration screen is displayed and the decoration pattern is hidden (the suspended image is also hidden). Various colors are used in the display area SG10. After that, in FIG. 4(d), the entire area of the display area SG10 is displayed only in black, and then in FIG. 4(e), a moving image different from that in FIG. becomes. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a timing when the display area SG10 is entirely black while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed. Displaying the entire area of the display area SG10 only in black (becomes only black) is referred to as "the entire area of the display area SG10 is non-display and the entire area of the display area SG10 is display off". There is

After that, in the same figure (f), the entire area of the display area SG10 is displayed only in white. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a timing during which the standby demonstration screen is displayed, and the entire area of the display area SG10 becomes only white. In FIG. 68, from (c) to (f) in FIG. 68 is the standby demonstration screen, and the display of the standby demonstration screen continues even after (f) in FIG. Although not shown, the display of the standby demonstration screen is configured such that a moving image of a specific time (for example, 30 seconds) loops. →(e)→(f)→(c)→(d)→...". In this case, "(c)→(d)→(e)→(f)" may be referred to as one cycle of the standby demo screen.

In (a), (b), (c), and (e) of the same figure, since various colors are used in the display region SG10, the pixels of the effect display device SG include a color filter R and a color filter R. There are pixels that allow light to pass through all of the filters G and B, pixels that do not pass through all of the color filters R, G, and B, and pixels that do not pass through all of the color filters R and G. and the color filter B are configured so that there are pixels through which light passes only through some of the color filters. In other words, when expressing the brightness of red, green, and blue, some pixels are displayed as (0, 0, 0), some pixels are displayed as (255, 255, 255), and some pixels are displayed as ( 120, 0, 90) and so on.

In this embodiment, one pixel in the effect display device SG has a plurality of color filters R, color filters G, and color filters B, and a pixel through which light passes only through some of the color filters. This includes the case where light does not pass through all of one type of color filter, such as the case where light does not pass through all of the plurality of color filters R, and light passes through some of the plurality of color filters R, but there A part includes a case where light passes through only a part of one type of color filter, such as no light passes through.

In addition, in FIG. 4D, since the entire area of the display area SG10 is displayed only in black, the pixels of the effect display device SG include color filters R, G, and B. are configured to have only pixels through which light does not pass. In other words, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, only pixels displayed as (0, 0, 0) are configured. With such a configuration, the manager of the game parlor can confirm defects (mainly presence/absence of bright spots) of the display area SG10 of the performance display device SG by displaying the standby demonstration screen without executing the game. Therefore, even in a game arcade where a plurality of game machines are installed, the effect display device SG can be easily managed. Note that a bright spot is a pixel that causes a problem that it is always displayed in a predetermined color (white) or the like. In FIG. 4D, all pixels have a value of 0 corresponding to red, all pixels have a value of 0 corresponding to green, and all pixels have a value of 0 corresponding to blue. It's becoming

Further, as described above, the color of the back surface portion YK40 is configured to be the same color as black when all areas (pixels) of the display area SG10 are displayed as (0, 0, 0). may

In addition, in FIG. 4F, since the entire area of the display area SG10 is displayed only in white, the pixels of the effect display device SG include color filters R, G, and B. are configured to be only pixels through which light passes. In other words, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, only pixels displayed as (255, 255, 255) are configured. With such a configuration, the manager of the game parlor can confirm the malfunction (mainly the presence or absence of dead spots) of the display area SG10 of the performance display device SG by displaying the standby demonstration screen without executing the game. Therefore, even in a game arcade where a plurality of game machines are installed, the effect display device SG can be easily managed. A dark dot is a pixel that causes a problem that it is always displayed in black (becomes invisible). It should be noted that in FIG. 4F, all pixels have a value corresponding to red of 1 or more, all pixels have a value of 1 or more corresponding to green, and all pixels have a value of 1 or more corresponding to blue. 1 or more. In the figure, all pixels have a value corresponding to red of 1 or more, all pixels have a value of 1 or more corresponding to green, and all pixels have a value of 1 or more corresponding to blue. As an example of a certain situation, the case where the display area SG10 is displayed in black has been illustrated, but this is not a limitation, and while the standby demo screen is being displayed, all pixels correspond to green in colors other than black. is greater than or equal to 1 and the value corresponding to blue is greater than or equal to 1 in all pixels.

As described above, in the standby demonstration screen in the present embodiment, the timing when all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in black and the timing when all the areas of the display area SG10 are displayed only in white are different. is configured to have With this configuration, the manager of the game parlor can confirm the defect (mainly the presence or absence of dead spots) of the display area SG10 of the performance display device SG by displaying the standby demonstration screen without executing the game. Therefore, even in a game arcade where a plurality of game machines are installed, the performance display device SG can be easily managed.

The display area SG10 of the effect display device SG in this embodiment may be configured as follows while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed.
(1) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing when all of the color filters R, G, and B are pixels through which light does not pass.
(2) In one period of the standby demo screen, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, there is a timing at which only the pixels displayed are (0, 0, 0).
(3) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, all pixels have a value corresponding to red of 0, all pixels have a value of 0 corresponding to green, and all pixels have a value of 0 corresponding to blue. has a timing of
(4) In one period of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to red becomes 0 in all pixels.
(5) In one period of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to green becomes 0 in all pixels.
(6) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to blue becomes 0 in all pixels.
(7) In one cycle of the standby demonstration screen, there is a timing in which only pixels through which light does not pass through all of the color filters R are present.
(8) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing in which only pixels through which light does not pass through all the color filters G are present.
(9) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing when all the color filters B are pixels through which light does not pass.
(10) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing when only pixels through which light passes through all of the color filters R, G, and B are present.
(11) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, when expressed as the brightness of red, green, and blue, there is a timing at which only the pixels displayed at (255, 255, 255) are present.
(12) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to red becomes 1 or more in all pixels.
(13) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to green in all pixels becomes 1 or more.
(14) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing at which the value corresponding to blue becomes 1 or more in all pixels.
(15) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing when all the color filters R are pixels through which light passes.
(16) In one cycle of the standby demonstration screen, there is a timing when all the color filters G are pixels through which light passes.
(17) In one cycle of the standby demo screen, there is a timing when all the color filters B are pixels through which light passes.

Although the above configurations (1) to (17) are configurations during display of the standby demo screen, the above configurations (1) to (17) are also applicable to other situations. As an example, the above configurations (1) to (17) may be applied to effects during execution of a predetermined big win, effects during execution of a predetermined small win, execution of a predetermined ready-to-win effect, and the like. Further, it may be configured to have a plurality of types of standby demonstration screens, and in such a configuration, the above configurations (1) to (17) may be applied only to predetermined standby demonstration screens.

<<Configuration of the top surface>>
Next, the configuration of the upper surface of the pachinko game machine, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present specification, will be described in detail below. In addition, in the embodiments described in detail below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to other embodiments.

<Front view of pachinko machine>
First, FIG. 69 is a front view of a pachinko game machine applicable to this specification. Since the pachinko game machine according to FIG. 69 has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to FIG. 1, description of the configuration described above will be omitted.

First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has an upper surface portion D50 that is the upper surface side of the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14. The configuration of the upper surface portion D50 in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Perspective view of upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the upper surface part D50 of the pachinko game machine applicable to this specification. As shown, the upper right direction in the figure is the depth direction seen from the player, the lower left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the lower right direction in the figure is the right direction seen from the player. The upper left direction in the drawing is the left direction as seen from the player.

As illustrated, the upper surface portion D50 is composed of an outer frame D12 and a front frame D14. The front frame upper surface D52 is the upper surface of the front frame D14, and the outer frame upper surface D53 is the upper surface of the outer frame D12. The upper surface portion D50 has a step between the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14, and the front surface of the outer frame D12 forming the step is called a step surface D51. The step surface D51 may be referred to as a stepped portion, the outer frame D12 may be referred to as a base portion, and the front frame D14 may be referred to as a door portion.

Note that the stepped surface D51 may be the front surface of the outer frame D12 at a projecting portion of the outer frame D12 that projects upward with respect to the front frame D14 in a front view. Further, the step surface D51 may be a portion of the front surface of the outer frame D12 that is higher than the front frame upper surface D52. Also, the step surface D51 may be a portion of the upper portion of the front surface of the outer frame D12 that is not in contact with (or close to) the rear surface of the front frame D14.

<Side view of upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 71 is a side view of the upper surface part D50 of the pachinko game machine applicable to this specification. As shown, the right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the upward direction in the figure is the upward direction seen from the player. , and the downward direction in the drawing is the downward direction viewed from the player. Note that the upward direction and the downward direction may be referred to as the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the front frame upper surface D52 is inclined downward from the front to the back as viewed from the player (downward inclination). Because of this configuration, even when the game ball is placed in contact with the stepped surface D51 as shown in the figure, the game ball does not roll forward. , even if the game ball lands on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, it can be constructed so as not to fall toward the player. In addition, if it is on the front frame upper surface D52, it is configured to roll in the direction of the outer frame D12 regardless of where the game ball is placed.

70 and 71 are the configurations in the state where the game machine is installed in the game hall. For example, when the game machine is installed on a horizontal surface, the front frame upper surface D52 can It may be configured to be downward from the back to the front when viewed from the side, or may be configured to be horizontal. In the case of such a configuration, when it is installed in the game hall, it is installed with an inclination from the front side to the back side as viewed from the player.

Also, in the lower right part of the same figure, the stepped surface D51 and the configuration in which the surroundings of the game ball are enlarged are illustrated. As shown in the figure, when the height of the step surface D51 (height in the vertical direction, sometimes referred to as the length in the height direction) is A and the radius of the game ball is B, then A<B. It's becoming That is, the height direction length of the step surface D51 is configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball. With this configuration, when a game ball is placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame while the game machine is being transported to the game hall, the game ball may be hit by another game machine or a wall surface. Even if the game ball is pressed in the depth direction, the game ball rides on the upper surface D53 of the outer frame, thereby preventing the outer frame D12 from being pressed by the game ball.

Although not shown, the height (length in the direction of height) A of the step surface D51 is longer than the thickness (length in the direction of thickness) of game medals used in a reel-type game machine or the like. is configured as The thickness of the game medal in this case may be the thickness of the φ25 game medal or the thickness of the φ30 game medal. As an example, the thickness of a φ25 game medal is about 1.6 mm, and the thickness of a φ30 game medal is about 1.7 mm. By configuring in this way, in a game hall where pachinko game machines and reel-type game machines are installed, even if game medals are placed on the upper surface D52 of the front frame, they do not fall toward the player. can be configured as In addition, a ball tank or the like is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine to allow the game balls that flow into the out slot to flow down. There is a risk that trouble will occur. According to this configuration, even when the game medals are put on the front frame upper surface D52, the game medals do not run on the outer frame upper surface D53, thereby preventing the game medals from falling to the back side of the gaming machine. can be prevented.

<<Example of Modification of Configuration of Upper Surface Part D50>>
Next, a modified example of the upper surface portion D50 applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Perspective view of upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 72 is a perspective view of a modified example of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko game machine applicable to this specification. As shown, the upper right direction in the figure is the depth direction seen from the player, the lower left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the lower right direction in the figure is the right direction seen from the player. The upper left direction in the drawing is the left direction as seen from the player.

As illustrated, the upper surface portion D50 is composed of an outer frame D12 and a front frame D14. The front frame top surface D52 is the top surface of the front frame D14, and the outer frame top surface D53 is the top surface of the outer frame D12. The upper surface portion D50 has a step between the outer frame D12 and the front frame D14, and the front surface of the outer frame D12 forming the step is called a step surface D51. Further, the upper surface portion D50 has a groove portion D54 on the front frame D14 side (on the front frame upper surface D52).

<Side view of upper surface portion D50>
Next, FIG. 73 is a side view of a modified example of the upper surface part D50 of the pachinko game machine applicable to this specification. As shown, the right direction in the figure is the back direction seen from the player, the left direction in the figure is the front direction seen from the player, and the upward direction in the figure is the upward direction seen from the player. , and the downward direction in the drawing is the downward direction viewed from the player. Note that the upward direction and the downward direction may be referred to as the vertical direction. Further, the surface that becomes the bottom of the groove D54 is called a groove bottom surface D55, and the side surface of the groove D54 is called a groove side surface D56.

As shown in the figure, the front frame upper surface D52 is inclined downward from the front to the back as viewed from the player (downward inclination). Also, as shown in the figure, it is configured such that a game ball can be held in the groove portion D54. That is, when the game ball is placed in the front direction than the groove D54 on the front frame upper surface D52, the game ball rolls in the depth direction without rolling in the front direction, and is held in the groove D54, or It is configured to cross over the groove portion D54 and stop in contact with the stepped surface D51. By constructing in this way, even if a game ball is put on the front frame upper surface D52, it can be constructed so as not to fall toward the player. Furthermore, the game ball placed in contact with the stepped surface D51 is configured to be held by the groove D54 even when the gaming machine is tilted toward the player. You can prevent it from falling.

Further, in the lower right part of the same figure, an enlarged configuration of the groove portion D54 and the periphery of the game ball is illustrated. As shown, the game ball is held in the groove D54, the height of the groove D54 perpendicular to the groove bottom D55 (the length in the height direction) is A, and the radius of the game ball is B. In this case, A<B. That is, the height of the groove D54 perpendicular to the groove bottom D55 (the length in the height direction) is shorter than the radius of the game ball. Further, when C is the height of the groove side D56 in the groove D54 (the vertical height of the groove D54) and B is the radius of the game ball, C<B. That is, the vertical height (length in the height direction) of the groove portion D54 is configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball. With this configuration, when a game ball is held in the groove portion D54 while the game machine is being transported to a game hall, the game ball is held by another game machine or a wall surface. Even if pressure is applied in the depth direction, the game ball rides on the upper surface D53 of the outer frame from the groove D54, so that the groove D54 is not pressured by the game ball.

72 and 73, in a modified example of the upper surface portion D50 of the pachinko game machine applicable to the present specification, the front frame upper surface D52 does not have an inclination and is horizontal. Alternatively, it may be configured such that it slopes downward from the back toward the front as viewed from the player. Even when configured in this manner, the game ball can be held in the groove portion D54 in the same manner as in the configuration described above.

72 and 73 are the configurations in the state where the game machine is installed in the game hall. For example, when the game machine is installed on a horizontal surface, the front frame upper surface D52 can be It may be configured to be downward from the back to the front when viewed from above, or may be configured to be horizontal. In the case of such a configuration, when it is installed in the game hall, it is installed with an inclination from the front side to the back side as viewed from the player.

It should be noted that the stepped portion may be provided in a portion other than the upper surface portion D50. For example, in FIG. It may be configured as The stepped portion may be provided on the side of the outer frame D12 (the outer frame D12 may protrude forward from the player's perspective) or may be provided on the side of the inner frame D16 (the inner frame D16 may protrude in front of the player). Also, the height of the stepped portion (the height in the front side direction as seen from the player) may be configured to be less than the radius of the game ball.

<<Configuration for immersion prevention display>>
Next, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, a configuration for displaying an immersion prevention display will be described in detail below. In addition, in the embodiments described in detail below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to other embodiments.

In the following, as an example, a configuration for displaying a warning image (prevention display) on the effect display device in a reel-type game machine will be described in detail. It is supplemented that it can be applied to the pachinko game machine related to the book.

In game machines, as a measure against addiction (a measure for reducing the number of players who play games beyond their means), attention is called during display of a standby demo screen. However, most of the players who are watching the standby demonstration screen displayed on the effect display device S40 (in the pachinko game machine, the effect display device SG) during the standby demonstration period are already absorbed (beyond their means). A player who is about to start playing a game rather than a player who is currently playing a game, and therefore cannot exert the expected effect as a countermeasure against addiction, and plays beyond his means. there was no shortage of people.

Preoccupation is thought to occur as a result of the player's inability to make cool decisions. The timings when there is a high possibility that you will not be able to make calm judgments include the following timings.

(1) Timing of end of AT state, etc. When the state related to AT is AT state, a large number of game medals may be awarded, so the player may not be able to distinguish between them and make a calm decision. It can be said that the quality is high. In addition, it is easy to have expectations that a further AT state may be hidden (maybe winning the AT lottery), and there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to make calm judgments. Furthermore, when the AT state ends, the total number of game medals granted in the AT state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, if the number of game medals granted in the AT state is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used to play the game up to that point, it is said to take it back (let's win the AT lottery). It can be said that it is easy to fall into feelings, and there is a high possibility that a calm person will not be able to make decisions. This phenomenon occurs not only when the AT state is actually terminated, but also when the AT counter value becomes 0, when push order navigation is terminated, or when the AT state is not actually terminated. However, it also occurs when a screen is displayed on the effect display device S40 to suggest that the AT in progress state has ended under the control of the sub-control board S.

(2) Timing at which the bonus game ends During the bonus game, a large number of game medals may be awarded, so there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to distinguish between them and will not be able to make a calm decision. In addition, if the number of times the bonus role is won from the start of the game to that time is large, it is easy to expect that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 5 or more), and it is difficult to make a calm judgment. It is highly likely that this will not be possible. Furthermore, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals awarded during the bonus game and the like are displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, if the number of game medals granted during the bonus game is less than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount spent from the start of the game up to that point, take it back (win the bonus role). It is easy to fall into this feeling, and it can be said that there is a high possibility that a calm person will not be able to make decisions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a bonus game, in which many game medals can be awarded (hereinafter, a game advantageous to the player may be referred to as an advantageous game) ends. At the timing, I tried to call attention. In the following description, the advantageous game may mean either one of the bonus game or the AT state, or may mean both the bonus game and the AT state.

Next, FIG. 74 shows an end screen of the bonus game displayed on the effect display device S40 at the end of the advantageous game, an end screen of the AT state, and an image for calling attention (hereinafter referred to as "attention image"). is an example of The end screen is an image showing at least the total number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game (TOTAL XXX) and the background (...). It should be noted that the image showing the total number of game medals granted during the advantageous game (TOTAL XXX) may be displayed as a separate image from the image showing the background (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "background image"). good. In addition, the warning image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 to prevent the above-mentioned addiction, and is an image that clearly states, "Beware of addiction. Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately." is.

Since the "attention calling image" is an image for calling the player's attention, it is preferable to display it on the effect display device S40 prior to the game screen. That is, it is preferable to display so as to be in the foreground rather than the effect screen. ) in the graphic layer of the "reminder image". Specifically, display the "Attention image" on the top graphic layer, display the push order navigation effect on the graphic layer behind the "Attention image" graphic layer, and display the background image It is preferable to configure so that it is displayed on the graphic layer on the back side rather than the graphic layer of the forward navigation effect by pressing . By doing so, the "attention calling image" is always displayed on the front side facing the player, and is displayed without being obstructed by the effect screen, and the "attention calling image" is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the size of the display area of the attention calling image displayed on the effect display device S40 at the end of the advantageous game will be described. If the display area of the attention calling image is too small, it is difficult for the player to recognize the image, and thus the expected effect as a countermeasure against addiction cannot be exhibited. On the other hand, if the display area is too large, it may interfere with viewing other images on the effect display device S40. In other words, the alert image may make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the size of the display area of the effect display device S40 that displays the attention calling image is less than 7 inches (in other words, in the case of a small effect display device), the attention calling image Preferably, the size is 10,00 mm or more in length and 64,12 mm in width. In addition, when the size of the display area of the effect display device S40 that displays the attention calling image is 7 inches or more (in other words, in the case of a large effect display device S40), the size of the attention calling image is set vertically. is 30,00 mm and the width is 192,37 mm.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the timing of displaying the end screen and the attention calling image on the effect display device S40 will be described. (a) and (b) in FIG. 76 both exemplify the final game of the advantageous game, and when game medals are given in the final game of the advantageous game (when a small win is won), the number of credits , or after paying out the game medals, both the end screen and the caution image are displayed on the effect display device S40 (FIG. 76(a)). Further, when game medals are not awarded in the final game of the advantageous game (such as when a replay combination wins), after the rotation of all the reels M50 in the final game of the advantageous game has stopped, the effect display device S40 will display an end screen. Both the rousing image is displayed (FIG. 76(b)).

Next, the timing at which the effect display device S40 hides the end screen will be described. One of the reasons for displaying the end screen is to notify the player of the total number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game. That is, if the end screen is displayed for a time sufficient for the player to recognize the total number of game medals awarded during the advantageous game, there is no problem even if the end screen is hidden. The timing may be the operation timing of the start lever D50 related to the next game of the final game, the game medal insertion timing related to the next game of the final game, the bet button operation timing related to the next game of the collecting game, and the like.

Further, in this embodiment, when the start lever D50 is operated, the effect display device S40 displays an effect screen corresponding to the game situation at that time. For example, when the state during AT ends and the game section becomes a normal section, if a cherry win, which is one of the minor wins, is won, the winning of a cherry win as shown in FIG. 77(a). It is possible to display a production screen suggesting Further, after the bonus game is completed, the state shifts to the AT preparation state 1, and if the push-order bell combination, which is one of the small combinations, is won, the stop button is operated in any order as shown in FIG. 77(b). It is possible to display a push order image (hereinafter also referred to as "push order navigation effect" or "push order navigation display") and the effect screen of AT preparation state 1 (the same applies to AT preparation state 2).

Next, the time for which the alert image is displayed will be described. If the time for displaying the attention calling image is too short, the player cannot sufficiently recognize the attention calling image, and the effect expected as a countermeasure against addiction cannot be exhibited. Moreover, even if the attention-calling image can be recognized, the expected effect as a countermeasure against addiction cannot be exhibited without worrying about it. On the other hand, if the display time of the alert image is too long, it may interfere with viewing other images. In other words, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable by being distracted from the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the attention-calling image is continuously displayed for a period of time during which the effect expected as a countermeasure against addiction (to make the player aware that the player is addicted) can be exhibited and the player does not feel uncomfortable. I have to. The time appropriate for continuing to display the alert image will be described in order below.

First, with reference to FIG. 78, the time spent by the player when playing the game in the shortest time will be described. After the start lever D50 is operated, it takes about 180 ms from when the reel M50 starts to rotate until the rotation speed of the reel M50 becomes constant. In addition, the maximum time from when the stop button is operated to when the rotation of the reel M50 stops is 190 ms (Article 6 of the Regulations Concerning Approval of Gaming Machines and Examination of Models (Technical Issues Concerning Gaming Machine Models). standard)). Furthermore, the time spent adding the given game medals as the number of credits or the time spent actually paying out the game medals is about 40 ms per game medal. That is, the time spent by the player when playing the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals to be awarded, but if the specification is such that multiple stop buttons cannot be operated simultaneously (multiple reels M50 cannot be controlled to stop at the same time). For example, it takes about 750ms to about 1070ms (when the number of awarded game medals is 0 to 8). It can be said that it takes about 690 ms (when the number of awarded game medals is 0 to 8).

In addition, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, it is possible to play one game in less than the minimum playing time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more as described above in this embodiment). cannot be terminated. This is the interpretation of Table 5 (1) R (a) shown in Article 6 of the Regulations Concerning Approval of Gaming Machines and Examination of Models (Technical Standards for Gaming Machine Types) and its technical standards. stipulated in the standards. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, even when the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated immediately after the previous game ends, The rotation of the reel M50 related to the game of (1) starts after 4100 ms have passed since the rotation of the reel M50 related to the previous game started, so that one game is completed in less than the minimum playing time. It is designed so that it will not be lost.

In general, in a BB game, which is one of the bonus games, a small combination that does not require eye pressing (a small combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button) is won with a high probability (it is also possible to win good). In addition, in the AT state, it is necessary to operate the stop button in a specific order. D3, replay-E1 to E3, and replay-F1 to F3) are notified in which order the operation should be performed. Furthermore, during a bonus game or during an AT state, the player feels a sense of accomplishment. Therefore, at least during an advantageous game such as a bonus game or an AT state (a game state relatively advantageous to the player), the game progresses in a relatively short time compared to when many players are not in an advantageous game. are doing.

It should be noted that, as described above, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, it is not possible to finish one game in less than the minimum playing time. That is, as shown in FIG. 80, when the final game of the advantageous game is played in the shortest time, even if the start lever D50 is operated immediately, there is a certain amount of time before the reel M50 starts rotating. Further, even after the reel M50 starts rotating, it takes a certain amount of time until the rotational speed of the reel M50 becomes constant. During these times, any operation by the player is invalid, so even if the attention calling image continues to be displayed, the player will not feel uncomfortable. If it continues to be displayed, it may make the player feel uncomfortable. This is because, when these times are exceeded, at least the operation of the stop button is effective, but the stop button is not possible because of the superimposition of the warning image and the suggestion of winning the cherry hand as shown in FIG. 77(a). D40 cannot be operated (because the player cannot see which role to aim for), or the attention calling image is displayed on the front graphic layer, so the stop button D40 should not be operated. This is because there is a feeling of uneasiness that there is no such thing. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable that the time for which the alert image is continued to be displayed does not exceed these times.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the appropriate time for continuing to display the attention calling image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. The reason why 3000 ms or more is set is that the longer the attention-calling image continues to be displayed, the more firmly the player will recognize the attention-calling by the attention-calling image, and the expected effect as a countermeasure against addiction can be exhibited. because it will be

As shown in FIG. 81, it is thought that there are a few players who do not play in the shortest time but spend more time playing during the advantageous game. In that case, if the attention calling image is displayed continuously for 3210 ms, the operation of the stop button related to the game after the end of the advantageous game is valid at least during the display of the attention calling image, so there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. . However, a player who spends a lot of time playing a game even during an advantageous game is more likely to feel less discomfort than a player who plays the game in the shortest possible time. By the way, if the game is played in the shortest time after the attention calling image is hidden, one game can be finished before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although one game could normally be finished before the minimum playing time elapses, the warning image continued to be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfaction that the game could not be finished (lost).

Next, the position where the attention calling image is displayed on the effect display device S40 will be described. Basically, it is preferable to display at a position that is easy for the player to recognize. One of the positions that the player can easily recognize is the position above the center of the housing. This is because the player's eye level is above the center of the housing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 of this embodiment, the effect display device S40 is positioned above the center of the housing (when viewed from the player), and as shown in FIG. The alert image is displayed above the center. Of course, if the effect display device S40 is provided above the center of the housing, it is above the center of the effect display device S40, the upper right corner from the center (when viewed from the player), the upper left corner from the center (game from the player's point of view), below the center (from the player's point of view), below the center on the right corner (from the player's point of view), below the center on the left corner (from the player's point of view) A wake-up image may be displayed. That is, the display position of the attention calling image on the performance display device S40 may be appropriately determined so that the player can accurately view the attention calling image according to the position where the performance display device S40 is arranged.

Further, it is preferable to determine the position of displaying the attention calling image in the effect display device S40 in consideration of the position where the image other than the attention calling image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display the attention-calling image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the total number of game medals awarded during advantageous games (TOTAL XXX) or the image suggesting that the player has won the cherry role. . In addition, it is preferable to display the attention calling image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the push order navigation effect. As described above, it is preferable to display the "attention image" on the topmost graphic layer, but in the case of a configuration in which the "attention image" is displayed on the graphic layer for displaying the image for effect, It is preferable to display it at a position that does not overlap with the push order navigation effect. Also, even if it is configured to display the "attention image" on the top graphic layer, if it is assumed that the timing of the push order navigation effect and the timing of displaying the "attention image" overlap , it is preferable to display the "attention image" at a position that does not overlap with the push order navigation effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even during the display of the standby demonstration screen, attention is called (a warning image is displayed). FIG. 82 shows an example of a standby demonstration screen displayed on the effect display device S40. As described above, "during display of the standby demo screen" is displayed when the game is not executed for a predetermined period of time.

When the standby demo screen is being displayed, first an image showing the manufacturer of the gaming machine is displayed (FIG. 82(a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 82(b)). After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, an image (hereinafter referred to as a demo screen) that introduces the theme, background, etc. of the performance including the characters and objects appearing in the performance of the reel-type game machine is displayed in a moving image format. (FIG. 82(c)). In this manner, during the display of the standby demonstration screen, the effect display device S40 repeatedly displays the images from Fig. 82(a) to Fig. 82(c).

As described above, most of the players watching the demo screen are players who are about to start the game, not players who are actually into the game. As a countermeasure against addiction, it is conceivable to give an impression in advance to a player who is about to start a game that he/she should not become addicted, but if excessive attention is given, there is a risk that the desire to play will be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time during which the image for calling attention (attention calling image) continues to be displayed during the display of the standby demonstration screen is changed to the image for calling attention at the end of the advantageous game (attention image). is shorter than the time it continues to be displayed. In other words, it is less than 3000ms. Specifically, it is preferable that the longest time is 2000 ms or less. However, it is not limited to this.

The position and size of the attention calling image when the attention calling image is displayed during the display of the standby demonstration screen are the same as the position and size when the attention calling image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game. This is because the load on the sub-control board S may increase if the display position is changed depending on the situation. Also, if the size is changed depending on the situation, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

It should be noted that the size of the attention-calling image displayed on the performance display device S40 may be larger at the end of the advantageous game than during the standby demonstration within a range that does not affect the processing load of the sub-control board S. good. This is because there is a possibility that the need to make the player aware of his addiction is higher at the end of the advantageous game than during the standby demonstration.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, the case where an error occurs in the final game of the advantageous game will be described. In this embodiment, even if an error occurs during the period from when the start lever D50 is operated until all the reels M50 stop rotating, the progress of the game is stopped until all the reels M50 stop rotating. It is designed not to. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs during the period from when the start lever D50 is operated to when all the reels M50 stop rotating, the player loses concentration and presses the stop button. This is because there is a possibility that an operation mistake (such as being unable to operate the stop button at an arbitrary timing) may easily occur. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

After that, when all the reels M50 stop rotating (when the progress of the game stops), an error image is displayed on the effect display device S40. This is because if an error image is displayed when an error occurs, the player may be surprised and make an operation mistake (such as being unable to operate the stop button at an arbitrary timing). . After that, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if game medals are given, the given game medals are added as credits or the game medals are actually paid out), and the effect display device S40 is displayed. An end screen and a warning image are displayed.

Although it takes a certain amount of time until the error is cleared, the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Of course, since the attention calling image continues to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the player may feel uncomfortable. Since there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion will not be exhibited, the warning image is configured to continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Also, since it will take a certain amount of time to clear the error, there is a possibility that the warning image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, which may not cause discomfort. This is because the

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where an error occurs under the condition that the caution image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In this embodiment, if an error occurs between the end of a certain game and the operation of the start lever D50 for the next game, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, when the progress of the game is stopped due to the occurrence of an error, the effect display device S40 displays an error image superimposed on the caution image. By the way, since it is necessary to quickly notify the player, the game staff, etc. that an error has occurred, the priority of the error image is set higher than that of the warning image. In addition, as mentioned above, it is designed to be displayed in the "attention image" on the top graphic layer, but the error image is displayed on the top graphic layer, and the "attention image" is displayed behind the error image It can be displayed on the side graphic layer. Alternatively, both the "attention calling image" and the error image may be displayed on the uppermost graphic layer. After that, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if game medals are given, the given game medals are added as credits or the game is actually paid out), and an error image is displayed on the effect display device S40. is hidden.

It will take a certain amount of time to clear the error, but it does not include the time that the error image continues to be displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared), and the predetermined time (3000 ms or more) , and 3210 ms or less), the alert image continues to be displayed. The time during which the error image was displayed before the error image was displayed (the error occurred) is included, and the caution image is displayed for the remaining time after the error is cleared. Of course, since the attention calling image continues to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the player may feel uncomfortable. Since there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion may not be exhibited, the warning image is configured to continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Also, since it will take a certain amount of time to clear the error, there is a possibility that the warning image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button is enabled, which may not cause discomfort. This is because the

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the case where the power supply is stopped under the condition that the caution image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped (temporarily stopped), and when power supply is restarted, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is restarted.

Further, when the power supply is stopped, the display on the effect display device S40 is also stopped (becomes non-display), and when the power supply is restarted, the display on the effect display device S40 is resumed. Note that the alert image continues to be displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time during which the image was displayed before the power supply was stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the attention calling image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

The demonstration screen may be always displayed on the effect display device S40 when the power supply is restarted. Even on the demo screen, there is no problem because the warning image is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the case where the effect switch is operated under the condition that the caution image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game will be described. In the present embodiment, when game medals are given, the amount of time from when the given game medals are added as the number of credits or when the game medals are actually paid out to when the game medals are inserted (operated by the bet button and inserted from the insertion port) is When the sub-input button is operated during this period, the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, when the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, items such as password input, QR code (registered trademark) display, and payout table can be selected by operating the cross key. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the cross key and the sub-input button.

Even if the sub-input button is operated and the menu screen is displayed, the warning image continues to be displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because if the warning image is not displayed when the menu screen is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against addiction cannot be exhibited.

However, the position to display the attention-calling image in the situation where the menu screen is displayed is a position where the selected item can be seen (a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the selected item). In other words, as long as the selected item can be identified, the items may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In addition, the position where the attention calling image is displayed is set so as not to overlap with the QR code (registered trademark) displayed when the QR code (registered trademark) display is selected as much as possible. This is to prevent a player who wants to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately due to the continued display of the attention calling image.

In this embodiment, at the end of the advantageous game, the attention calling image is displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the end screen. At the time of ending, the attention calling image may not be displayed on the effect display device S40.

This is because if the number of game medals awarded during an advantageous game is extremely small, the player will not be able to distinguish between them, and the number of game medals awarded during an advantageous game is greater than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far. This is because even if the number of game medals collected is small, it is difficult for the player to fall into the desire to retrieve them (because it is almost impossible to retrieve them).

Examples of cases where the number of game medals awarded during an advantageous game are extremely small include a case where the number is less than 300 during an AT state, and a case where the number is less than 50 during a bonus game.

In this embodiment, when the advantageous game ends, the end screen and the attention calling image are displayed on the effect display device S40, but when the end screen is not displayed, the attention calling image may not be displayed. . For example, when the game is played 20 times in succession in the AT state, the moving image is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the 20th game in the AT state. Even if a bonus combination is won in the 20th game in the AT state, even during the bonus game and at the end of the bonus game, the effect display device S40 wants to continue displaying the moving image, so the effect is produced at the end of the bonus game. The end screen is not displayed on the display device S40. In such a case, the attention-calling image may not be displayed because it interferes with viewing the displayed moving image. However, at the end of the twentieth game in the AT state, it is preferable to display the end screen and the caution image on the effect display device S40.

In this embodiment, the size of the attention-calling image is set to the size shown in FIG. 75, but any size may be used as long as the size of the attention-calling image can exhibit the expected effect as a countermeasure against addiction, and the size of the attention-calling image larger than the size shown in FIG. may be

Also, the size of the attention calling image displayed at the end of the advantageous game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the size when displayed with the end screen of the advantageous game and the size when displayed with the effect screen may be different sizes. For example, since there is a possibility that a large amount of game medals were awarded in the advantageous section, at the timing when the game section returns from the advantageous section to the normal section, the size of the attention calling image is displayed at the maximum or It is preferable to display for a long time.

In the present embodiment, when game medals are awarded, the effect display device S40 displays the end screen and the caution image after the number of credits is added or after the game medals are paid out. may be displayed on the effect display device S40 after the stop button D40 is stopped, or may be displayed on the effect display device S40 when the last stop button D40 is released. In addition, when game medals are not awarded, the effect display device S40 displays the end screen and the caution image after the rotation of all the reels M50 stops, but the effect is produced when the last stop button D40 is released. It may be displayed on the display device S40.

In this embodiment, the end screen and the attention calling image are displayed on the effect display device S40 at the same timing, but the attention calling image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Furthermore, the alert image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed.

In this embodiment, the end screen is hidden when the start lever D50 is operated after the game medals for the next game are inserted, regardless of whether game medals are awarded in the final game. When game medals are awarded in the final game, the end screen is displayed when the game medals for the next game are inserted (when the bet button D220 is operated or when the game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot D170). may be hidden.

Also, the alert image may not be displayed when a predetermined time has passed since the end screen was displayed. This is because not only the end screen but also the attention calling image is displayed on the effect display device S40, so there is a possibility that the player who feels uneasy does not operate the start lever D50.

In this embodiment, the effect display device S40 is provided above the center of the housing, but the effect display device S40 may be provided near the center of the housing. In that case, if the attention-calling image is displayed above the center of the effect display device S40, in the upper right corner of the center, in the upper left corner of the center, or in the center, it will be displayed at a position close to the eye level of the player. Become. It should be noted that if only one effect display device S40 is provided, the player's line of sight will gather there, so the attention calling image is displayed below the center, below the center below the right corner, or below the center below the left corner. No problem.

Also, the effect display device S40 may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing. If only one effect display device S40 is provided, the player's line of sight will gather there. A warning image may be displayed in the lower right corner or the lower left corner than the center.

Also, the position of the attention calling image displayed at the end of the advantageous game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the position where the alert image is displayed together with the end screen may be different from the position where it is displayed together with the effect screen (for example, the preview effect screen) other than the end screen.

In this embodiment, FIGS. 82(a) to 82(c) are repeatedly displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed, but the display order may be changed. For example, FIGS. 83(a) to 83(c) may be repeatedly displayed. The reason why the player sees the demo screen before starting the game is to confirm what the theme of the reel-type game machine to start the game is. When an image for calling attention is displayed before an image introducing the subject matter of the reel-type gaming machine is displayed as in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced. , the display order is preferably changed. Note that the order of replacement is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, the time for which the attention calling image is displayed during the display of the standby demonstration screen is set to less than 3000 ms. , may continue to be displayed for 3000 ms or more.

In this embodiment, the position and size of the attention calling image displayed during the display of the standby demo screen are the same as the position and size when displayed at the end of the advantageous game. may be changed depending on the situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 84, when the attention calling image is always displayed during the display of the standby demonstration screen, the image may be displayed small in the upper right corner from the center of the effect display device S40. This is a device for avoiding even a little excessive attention since the time for which the attention-calling image continues to be displayed becomes longer. Note that the display position and size are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, even if an error occurs during the period from when the start lever D50 is operated until all the reels M50 stop rotating, the progress of the game is stopped until all the reels M50 stop rotating. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the given game medals are added as credits or are actually paid out (except when no game medals are given).

In this embodiment, when an error occurs during the period from when the start lever D50 is operated to when all the reels M50 stop rotating, when the progress of the game stops, an error image is displayed on the effect display device S40. However, an error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, the game clerk can rush to the game, and the error can be canceled immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

In this embodiment, if an error occurs during the period from when the start lever D50 is operated until all the reels M50 stop rotating, the minimum playing time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum playing time may be temporarily stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the attention calling image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, if an error occurs between when the start lever D50 is operated and when all the reels M50 stop rotating, a predetermined time ( 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), the warning image continues to be displayed, but the time for which the warning image continues to be displayed is shortened by the time spent until the error is canceled or the time corresponding to that time. good too. For example, when it takes 60000 ms or more to clear the error, the alert image may be displayed continuously for 1000 ms.

In the present embodiment, if an error occurs in a situation where the caution image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the error image is displayed superimposed on the caution image. If an error occurs while an image is being displayed, the alert image may be hidden and an error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is cleared, the error image may be hidden and the attention image may be displayed (the time for which the attention image is continued to be displayed is a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms). below)). This is suitable when it is desired to give the same priority to the error image and the caution image.

In this embodiment, if an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time during which the error image continues to be displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled) is included. Instead, the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). , the alert image may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Regardless of whether or not an error image is displayed (whether or not an error has occurred), it is only necessary to continue to display the alert image for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), so the sub control board S You don't have to increase the burden on your side.

In this embodiment, if an error occurs while the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time that the error image was displayed before the error image was displayed (the error occurred) is included. However, it is possible not to include the time during which the error image was displayed before it was displayed (an error occurred). This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's attention will be diverted from the attention-calling image due to the error image being displayed.

In this embodiment, if an error occurs while the caution image is being displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum playing time may be temporarily stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the attention calling image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of an advantageous game, the priority of the error image (also referred to as display priority, display priority) is set higher than the warning image. However, the priority of the alert image may be set higher than that of the error image. However, it is not preferable that the type of error that has occurred cannot be identified by the image that calls attention, so it is preferable that the position where the image that calls attention does not overlap with the position where the type of error that has occurred is specified. . Note that the error image and the alert image may overlap as long as the type of error that has occurred can be identified.

In this case, the warning image is displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time during which the error image continues to be displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). You may continue to do so.

In the present embodiment, when the power supply is stopped while the alert image is displayed at the end of the advantageous game, the time during which the power supply was stopped is included. , the warning image continues to be displayed again for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) after the power supply is restarted, excluding the time that it was displayed before the power supply was stopped. can be This is suitable when there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness will deviate from the attention-calling image due to the stoppage of power supply.

In the present embodiment, the effect display device S40 that starts up (resumes the display) immediately after power supply is resumed is used. The attention-calling image may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time during which it was displayed before it stopped. Depending on the time it takes to start up, the warning image will continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, which may cause discomfort to the player. This is because if the continuous time is shortened, there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion cannot be exhibited. However, if there is a possibility that the player will feel a great deal of discomfort, the time during which the attention-calling image continues to be displayed may be shortened by the time until activation or a predetermined time corresponding to that time. Note that the time during which the attention-calling image is continuously displayed before the power supply is stopped may not be included in the time during which the attention-calling image is continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, when game medals are given, the game medals are inserted after the given game medals are added as the number of credits or are actually paid out (when the bet button D220 is operated, or when the medal insertion slot D170 When the sub-input button SB is operated during the period from (1) to (2) when game medals are inserted), the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. Regardless, if the sub-input button SB is operated before the start lever D50 is operated, the menu screen may be displayed on the effect display device S40. The menu screen is a screen for setting the game environment, such as the volume output from the speaker S20 and the brightness of the effect display device S40, according to the preferences of the player.

In the present embodiment, the position where the attention-calling image is displayed is set to a position where the selected item can be seen when the menu screen described above is displayed. can be By doing so, it is possible to positively turn the player's attention to the attention-calling image and make him/her aware that he/she is absorbed in the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, even if the attention calling image continues to be displayed, the operation of the start lever D50 or the like is valid (the game progresses), but this is not the only option. Instead, while the alert image continues to be displayed, a freeze effect similar to the freeze effect described above may be executed. In other words, the operation of the start lever D50 or the like may be disabled (progress of the game may be stopped). Although it gives the player a sense of displeasure, the effect expected as a countermeasure against addiction can be maximized. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long period of time, it is possible to reduce the desire to play the game to some extent. In this case, it is appropriate that the time during which the attention calling image continues to be displayed is a time during which the player's desire to play can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, the time is longer than the minimum playing time), the player may end the game. Therefore, it is preferable that the time for which the alert image continues to be displayed is 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

In the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 85, after the end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, the end screen may be hidden and only the attention calling image may be displayed. By displaying only the attention calling image, the player's attention can be surely directed to the attention calling image, so that the effect expected as a countermeasure against addiction can be exhibited more effectively. After a predetermined period of time (predetermined time of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) has elapsed since the alert image was displayed, the alert image is hidden and the end screen is displayed again. Alternatively, only the alert image may continue to be displayed.

First, the standby demo screen is displayed in the order of FIG. 82(b), FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 82(c). (b) may continue to be displayed. This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG. 85(b).

In this embodiment, the attention is called by the effect display device S40, but the attention may be called by a device other than the effect display device S40. For example, an image having the same content as the attention-calling image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing located at a position that the player can easily recognize.

The alert image is not limited to the illustrated one. For example, an image (display) that clearly states, "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately. Be careful not to get addicted." or "Be careful not to be addicted. good too.

Note that the color and font of the characters are free as long as they are not difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color of the background image when displaying the attention calling image is similar, it may be difficult for the player to recognize it. are preferably different colors. In particular, it is preferable to use a color that is directly opposite in the color wheel (hereinafter also referred to as "opposite color") or a color that is close to the opposite color because the color stands out.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate time for continuing to display the attention calling image is calculated by taking as an example the maximum number of game medals to be awarded during an advantageous game of eight. Even when the maximum number of medals is 9 or more and 15 or less, the appropriate time for continuing to display the attention calling image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Indeed, when 15 game medals are awarded, it takes about 280 ms more to pay out than when 8 game medals are awarded. By appropriately shortening the time, it is possible to hide the alert image before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. However, even if the attention-calling image is hidden about 280 ms after the operation of the stop button becomes effective, it is extremely unlikely that the player will notice it. In that case, the longer it is, the more expected effects can be achieved as a countermeasure against addiction. Therefore, it is preferable that the appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. .

<Warning image on standby demo screen>
As described above with reference to FIG. 82, when the standby demo screen is displayed, an image indicating the manufacturer of the gaming machine is first displayed (FIG. 82(a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 82(b)). After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, an image (sometimes referred to as a standby demo screen) that introduces the theme and background of the production, including characters and objects that appear in the production of the game machine, is displayed in video format ( FIG. 82(c)). In this manner, during the display of the standby demonstration screen, the effects display device S40 repeatedly displays the images from Fig. 82(a) to Fig. 82(c).

Here, in FIG. 82(b), the attention calling image is displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed, and the colors of the attention calling image are mainly yellow and black, for example. . On the other hand, the display areas other than the attention-calling image are all displayed in white, and the color that occupies most of the attention-calling image and the background image is the opposite color or a color close to the opposite color.

That is, the background image (the image displayed in the display area other than the attention-calling image) during the display of the attention-calling image on the standby demonstration screen has all pixels displayed in white. , color filters G, and color filters B are the only pixels through which light passes. is configured to be By configuring in this way, the player can more easily pay attention to the attention calling image, and the visibility of the attention calling image (especially the visibility of the character information) is also improved.

In addition, the background image in the situation where the caution image is displayed while the standby demo screen is being displayed does not have to be all white. Alternatively, all the pixels forming the background image may be displayed in a color similar to white. In addition, such a configuration related to the background image may be configured to always be applied during the period in which the attention image is displayed, or may be configured to be applied at a predetermined timing (predetermined period) during the period in which the attention image is displayed. may be configured to apply

<Relationship between alert image and game effect lamp>
As described above, the background image is configured to be displayed in white in the situation where the attention calling image is displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 82(b). Under certain circumstances, the LED of the game effect lamp D26 may be configured to light up in the same white color as the background image of the effect display device. In such a configuration, all the LEDs of the game effect lamps D26 may be configured to have a timing at which they are lit in white, or have a timing at which more than half of the LEDs of the game effect lamps D26 are lit in white. Alternatively, all the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 may be configured to have a timing to light up in a color similar to white, or more than half of the LEDs of the game effect lamp D26 may be similar to white. It may be configured to have a timing for lighting in different colors. In addition, such a configuration relating to the game effect lamp D26 may be configured to always be applied during the period when the attention calling image is displayed, or at a predetermined timing (predetermined period of time) during the period when the attention calling image is displayed. ) may be configured to apply to

Also, in a situation where the attention calling image is displayed while the standby demonstration screen is being displayed, as shown in FIG. may be configured to display a color similar to white.

By configuring in this way, the player can easily pay attention to the alert image, and the visibility of the alert image (especially the visibility of the character information) is also improved.

In addition, as described above, the configuration for displaying the attention calling image during the display of the standby demonstration screen on the effect display device can be applied to both the pachinko game machine and the reel-type game machine.

<<Structure Regarding Transparent Plate D16>>
Next, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present specification, the configuration regarding the transparent plate D16 will be described in detail below. In addition, in the embodiments described in detail below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in this embodiment, members that have already been mentioned but are not given reference numerals in the above-described embodiment are newly given reference numerals, but such members exist only in this embodiment. Instead, it goes without saying that it is also present in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this applies not only to this embodiment but also to other embodiments.

First, FIG. 90 is a diagram relating to a transparent plate D16 applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present specification. The transparent plate D16 in the figure shows a state removed from the game machine.

(a) of FIG. 90 is a front view of the transparent plate D16. The transparent plate D16 is composed of a glass plate D60 and a transparent plate frame portion D61. The glass plate D60 is a glass plate that occupies most of the transparent plate D16, and the transparent plate frame portion D61 is a member made of plastic or the like provided around the glass plate. By providing the transparent plate frame portion D61 on the transparent plate D16, the glass plate D60 is prevented from being damaged by impact, vibration, or the like.

Next, FIG. 90(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transparent plate D16 taken along the line AA. The upward direction in the figure is the front side direction as seen from the player, and the downward direction in the same figure is the back side direction as seen from the player.

As illustrated, the transparent plate frame portion D61 has a frame stepped portion D62 that is a stepped portion from the glass plate D60. In addition, the frame stepped portion D62 is provided only in the depth side direction when viewed from the player, and is not provided in the front side direction. It should be noted that this figure is only an example, and the frame stepped portion D62 may be configured so that it is provided only in the front side direction as seen from the player, and is not provided in the depth side direction. Also, the maximum length in the height direction of the frame stepped portion D62 may be configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, or shorter than the thickness of a φ25 game medal. , and shorter than the thickness of a game medal of φ30.

By providing the frame stepped portion D62 only on one side of the transparent plate frame portion D61 in this way, it is possible to prevent the transparent plate D16 from being oriented in the wrong direction when it is attached to the door D18.

Next, FIG. 90(c) is a BB sectional view of the transparent plate D16. The upward direction in the figure is the front side direction as seen from the player, and the downward direction in the same figure is the back side direction as seen from the player.

As shown in the figure, a transparent plate gap D63 is provided only on the back side as viewed from the player between the transparent plate frame portion D61 and the glass plate D60. In addition, as the AA sectional view does not show the transparent plate gap D63, only a part of the transparent plate gap D63 is provided on the outer circumference of the glass plate D60 in the depth side direction as seen from the player. Although not shown, the distance (sometimes referred to as the gap width) between the surface of the glass plate D60 on the back side as seen from the player and the transparent plate frame portion D61 in the transparent plate gap D63 is not uniform, but has a plurality of types. has a gap width of In addition, the maximum length of the gap width is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from jumping out of the game machine. can.

The configuration of the transparent plate gap D63 in the figure is only an example, and the position of the transparent plate gap D63 on the glass plate D60 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. D63 may be provided, and other portions of the outer circumference of the glass plate D60 may be configured so as not to have the transparent plate gap D63.

In this manner, the transparent plate gap D63 in the glass plate D60 is provided on the back side as seen from the player, but is not provided on the front side as seen from the player. Wrong orientation can be prevented. It should be noted that the transparent plate gap D63 may be configured to be provided only on the near side as seen from the player.

In addition, the distance between the surface of the glass plate D60 on the far side as seen from the player and the transparent plate frame portion D61 in the transparent plate gap D63 (sometimes referred to as gap width) is not uniform, and there are multiple types of gap widths. By constructing the transparent plate D16 in such a manner that the strength of the transparent plate D16 is not excessively lowered, the game area can be ventilated, and problems such as deformation due to heat buildup in the game area are less likely to occur. As a result, the life of the gaming machine can be extended.

In addition, regarding the configuration related to the height of the frame stepped portion D62 described above, the height (length in the height direction) of the frame stepped portion D62 at a portion not having the transparent plate gap D63 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. It may be configured to be shorter, may be configured to be shorter than the radius of a game ball, may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of a φ25 game medal, or may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of a φ30 game medal. Alternatively, the height (length in the height direction) of the frame stepped portion D62, which is the highest including the portion not having the transparent plate gap D63, is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. It may be configured to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, it may be configured to be shorter than the thickness of the game medal of φ25, or the thickness of the game medal of φ30. It may be configured to be shorter than the thickness.

<<Structure Regarding Effect Display Device SG>>
Further, the following configuration may be applied as the configuration of the effect display device SG in the pachinko game machine in this specification.

An outer peripheral surface that protrudes forward when viewed from the player may be provided on the outer periphery of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG. When configured in this manner, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The display region SG10 side surface of the outer peripheral surface is black (or a color substantially the same as black). (2) The display region SG10 side surface of the outer peripheral surface is not mounted with a substrate. ) At least a part of the surface on the side of the display area SG10 on the outer peripheral surface is black (or a color substantially the same as black). One or more of the above-described configurations may be applied, and by configuring in this way, the light emitted by the effect display device SG is reflected on the outer peripheral surface and reflected in the effect display device SG. can be prevented (or reduced).

<<Gap Related Configuration>>
Further, as a configuration applicable to the pachinko game machine in this specification, it may be configured to have a gap in a part between the outer frame D12 and the door D18. In such a configuration, the length of the maximum width of the gap is preferably less than the diameter of the game ball. With this configuration, game balls will not accidentally enter the inside of the door D18, and cheating from the outside of the game machine can be prevented, and the game area can be ventilated. Problems such as deformation due to heat build-up in the game machine are less likely to occur, and the life of the game machine can be lengthened.

<<Game ball rolling on guide rail D33>>
As described above with reference to FIG. 42, in the pachinko game machine in this specification, when a game ball is shot by the shooting device D42, the shot game ball is part of the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34. It is configured to move along the guide rail D33 partitioned by the part, pass through the ball return prevention member D39 (prevention piece D39-1), and flow down the game area D30.

When the game ball is shot in this way, the game ball reaching the game area D30 (the game ball passing through the prevention piece D39-1) does not come into contact with the transparent plate D16 (the glass plate D60) regardless of the shooting intensity. It may be configured as As a specific example, a portion of the outer rail D32 (for example, a portion closer to the launcher D42 than the prevention piece D39-1 in the entire outer rail D32) is inclined downward from the front to the back when viewed from the player. , the direction in which the game ball is shot by the shooting device D42 is set at a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees ) may be shot in the depth direction (the game board D35 direction) as seen from the player.

The problem with the pachinko game machine (A1) is that when such game parts are attached to the game board, the game balls flowing down the game board collide with the screws that attach the game parts, causing the screws to loosen. may be lost. In this way, if the screw is loosened, the game balls overlap at the loosened part of the screw, which hinders the flow of the game balls, making it impossible to play the game. It becomes a factor. Therefore, it is desired to provide a pachinko game machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in the game of the player.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to aspect (1) is
a game board on which game balls can flow;
A transparent plate provided in front of the game board;
a plurality of game nails planted on the game board;
A predetermined screw provided on the flow path of the game ball and screwing the game part (for example, the center decoration D38) to the game board,
A first length (e.g., 1/3) of the longitudinal length (e.g., D) of a predetermined game nail implanted at the position closest to the predetermined screw For example, D2) is planted on the game board,
A second length (eg, 1/3×A), which is the length of the predetermined ratio (eg, 1/3) of the length of the predetermined screw in the longitudinal direction (eg, A), is within the game board. in a state in which the third length (for example, 2/3×A) of the predetermined screw protrudes from the game board,
A value (eg, C3) obtained by subtracting the third length from the length (eg, E) from the game board to the transparent plate is configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (eg, B). It is a pachinko machine.

According to the effect of the pachinko game machine (A1), according to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, even if the screws attaching the game parts to the game board are loosened, the downflow of the game ball is not hindered. There is an effect that it can be made like this.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (A2), currently the most popular pachinko machine, is triggered by a game ball entering the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main pattern) is displayed on the display part such as 7 segments game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols that are directly linked to the profits of the player, in addition to the above-mentioned “special symbols”, “decorative symbols” are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, providing a game part such as a center decoration on the game board helps to improve the amusement of the game.

Problems with the pachinko game machine (A2), when the pachinko game machine with such game parts provided on the game board is installed on the game island in a state where it is tilted from the front side to the rear side, a certain game that flows down the game area A situation occurs in which the ball stays on the game parts, preventing other game balls from flowing down and making it impossible to play the game. Therefore, it is desired to provide a pachinko game machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in the game of the player.

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to aspect (2) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
A transparent plate provided in front of the game board;
a plurality of game nails planted on the game board;
A game part (for example, center decoration D38) provided at a predetermined position of the game board and capable of rolling a game ball on the upper surface;
A predetermined screw provided on the flow path of the game ball and screwing the game part to the game board,
Having a predetermined portion (eg, eaves portion D38-1) on the upper surface of the game part,
The predetermined part is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is inclined downward toward the front.

Effect of the pachinko gaming machine (A2), according to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, even if the pachinko gaming machine is installed on the game island in a state of being inclined from the front side to the rear side, the game balls There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the situation of staying on the game parts.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (A3), currently the most popular pachinko machine, is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main pattern) is displayed on the display part such as 7 segments. game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, game components such as a ball return prevention member are provided on the game board to help improve the amusement of the game.

The problem with the pachinko game machine (A3) is that in the state where such a ball return prevention member is provided in the game area, a situation occurs in which the fired game ball flows back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the game area. , when the shot game ball flows into the game area, a situation occurs in which the game ball stays at the tip of the ball return prevention member, and the subsequent shot game ball flows into the game area and Since the progress of the game is hindered, it becomes one of the factors that impair the player's interest in the game. Therefore, it is desired to provide a pachinko game machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in the game of the player.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to aspect (3) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a guide rail for guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area;
A prevention piece (for example, prevention piece D39-1) that is provided near the exit of the guide rail and prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning into the guide rail,
The prevention piece has a first position (for example, a guide position) that can guide the game ball launched into the game area, and a second position that prevents the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning to the guide rail (for example, , initial position), and
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that when the prevention piece is located at the second position, the prevention piece faces upward, and game balls do not stay on the right side of the prevention piece.

According to the effect of the pachinko game machine (A3), according to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, the game ball is prevented from flowing back to the guide rail side after once flowing into the game area, and the game ball is released into the game area. It is effective in that it can also be prevented from staying in the water.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (B1), the most popular pachinko machine at present, is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, the game board is provided with a winning opening such as a starting opening, and a prize ball or special game is given to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening.

The problem with the pachinko game machine (B1) is that when the game parts of the winning opening such as the starting opening are attached to the game board, the ball entry sensor that detects the game ball that has passed through the starting opening is visually recognized by the player. There is a problem of cheating such as shooting a game ball attached to a fishing line while it is attached in a possible position and getting a prize ball by illegally entering the starting hole or aiming for a special game. . Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko game machine capable of preventing such fraudulent acts.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to aspect (4) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
A main game start opening provided at a predetermined position of the game board and into which a game ball can enter;
a guide channel through which a game ball that has entered the main game start port can flow down;
Equipped with a game ball detection device capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the main game start port,
The guide channel is provided with a guide channel configuration part that guides a game ball that enters the main game start port in a direction different from the ball entering direction,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that a guide flow passage forming part is interposed on a straight line connecting a predetermined portion of the entrance of the main game start port and a predetermined portion of the game ball detection device.

According to the effect of the pachinko game machine (B1) and the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent cheating.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (B2), the most popular pachinko machine at present, is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined mode. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method.

Problem of the pachinko gaming machine (B2), in such a pachinko gaming machine, it is configured to acquire a random number for determining whether to shift to a special game, triggered by the game ball entering the start opening. ing. In addition, there is a problem of fraudulent acts aimed at random numbers corresponding to special games by intentionally cutting off the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine and then restarting the power supply. Therefore, there is a demand for a pachinko game machine capable of preventing such fraudulent acts.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to aspect (5) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a guide rail for guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area;
a prevention piece provided near the exit of the guide rail for preventing the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning into the guide rail;
A main game start opening provided at a predetermined position of the game board and into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with a game ball detection device capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the main game start port,
A game ball is shot by the launcher and is moving along the guide rail. When the power supply is restarted and the launched game ball passes through the prevention piece and then passes through the game ball detection device through the main game start port, the game ball is detected by the game ball detection device after the power supply is restarted. The time (for example, ta) until it becomes possible to detect is the time from when the fired game ball passes through the prevention piece to when it passes through the game ball detection device via the main game start port (for example, The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured to be longer than t4).

According to the effect of the pachinko game machine (B2) and the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent cheating.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (B3), currently the most popular pachinko machine, is triggered by a game ball entering the start opening, and a "special pattern" (or main pattern) is displayed on the display part such as 7 segments. game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner. Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, providing a game part such as a center decoration on the game board helps to improve the amusement of the game.

The problem with the pachinko game machine (B3) is that when such game parts are attached to the game board, the game balls flowing down the game board collide with the game nails and game parts, causing the game balls to flow down unnecessarily. Although it is a rule, even after the game ball collides with the protective wall of the game part, which plays a role of protecting the inside of the game part, the flow of the game ball becomes irregular. Since it cannot be played, it becomes one of the factors that impair the interest of the player in the game. Therefore, it is desired to provide a pachinko game machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in the game of the player.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to aspect (6) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a plurality of game nails planted on the game board;
A center decoration (for example, a center decoration (for example, Equipped with a center decoration D38),
The game board and the mounting portion are configured to be attached by a predetermined attachment (for example, a screw BS1),
In a state in which the center of the game ball is positioned on a straight line connecting the center of the game nail closest to the mounting portion and the center of the predetermined fixture, and in a state in which the game ball is in contact with the wall portion, the front side This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed such that the entire game ball is superimposed on the mounting portion when viewed.

According to the effect of the pachinko game machine (B3) and the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Background technology of the pachinko machine (B4), the most popular pachinko machine at present, is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and a "special pattern" (or main game pattern) is variably displayed, and when the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than in the normal game state {normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to a game in which a large winning opening (so-called attacker) in a state is opened under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise ways to make the overall performance including the variation of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method. In addition, in this type of pachinko game machine, game nails are provided on the game board to help improve the amusement of the game.

A problem with the pachinko game machine (B4) is that in a state where such a game nail is provided on the game board, the game nail falls out of the game board due to the game balls flowing down the game board colliding with the game nail. Sometimes. In this way, if the game nail is pulled out, after the game ball is caught between the game nails on both sides of the part where the game nail is pulled out, the game balls overlap and prevent the game ball from flowing down, and the game is stopped. Since it becomes impossible, it becomes a factor that spoils the interest of the player in the game. Therefore, it is desired to provide a pachinko game machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in the game of the player.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to aspect (7) is
a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a continuous nail configured by arranging a plurality of game nails provided on the game board,
The chain nail is
At least the first game nail, the second game nail, and the third game nail are arranged in order,
In front view, the second game nail is provided at a higher position than the third game nail, and the first game nail is provided at a higher position than the second game nail,
In a state where the second game nail is pulled out from the game board and the game ball is in contact with the first game nail and the third game nail, the height of the game ball is higher than the upper end of the first game nail. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed such that the center is positioned higher when viewed from the front.

Effect of the pachinko game machine (B4), according to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, even if the game nail is pulled out from the game board, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being hindered. It has the effect of being able to

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entering ball determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance ball entrance determination means MJ11-C10 1st major winning entrance determination Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning entrance ball determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Reservation control means MJ31 Reservation digestion control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Winner lottery means MN11-A First main game lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game lottery table MN11-B Second main game lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination means , MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game progress means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP22t-B Second main game starter electric accessory open timer MP30 Special game control means MP31 Condition determination means MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special Game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize mouth electric role item opening and closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 Time saving end condition determination means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C First and second main game pattern information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout determination Means A 1st main game peripheral device A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game Symbol reserve display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start entrance detection device, B11d 2nd main game start electric accessory B20 2nd main game pattern display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display portion B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display portion, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big winning port, C11s 1st big winning port winning detection device C11d 1st big winning Mouth electric accessory, C20 2nd big prize opening C21s 2nd big prize opening winning detection device, C21d 2nd big prize opening electric accessory D38 Center decoration, D38-1 canopy part, D38-2 flow path, D38-4 flow Road D38-5 taper part, D38-6 mounting part, D38-7 wall part D39 ball return prevention member, D39-1 prevention piece, D39-2 base H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start opening Entering ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit P10 Left general winning opening, P20 Right general winning opening S Sub control board, SM Sub game control means (sub main control part)
MH20 Main display device, SH20 Sub display device SM10 Display information receiving means, SM11b Main side information temporary storage means SM20 Effect display control means, SM21 Decorative design display control means SM21n Design display content determination means, SM21ta Design variation content determination lottery Table SM21ta-2 Decorative design effect table, SM21b Design related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 First design variation time management timer, SM22 Design pending information display control means,
SM22b Design pending information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means SM25 Ready-to-win effect display control means SM25n Ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25b Ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hitting display control means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Effects display means (sub-sub control unit) SS10 Sub Information transmission/reception control means SS20 Image display control means SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area SG12 First reservation display area SG13 Second reservation display area KH Prize ball payout control board , KE prize ball dispensing device YK1 movable accessory device, YK12 logo accessory YK10 movable base portion, YK30 front surface portion YK40 back surface portion, YK21 accessory lamp YK22 countersunk screw, D50 upper surface portion D51 stepped surface, D52 front frame upper surface D53 Outer frame upper surface D54 Groove D55 Groove bottom D56 Groove side D60 Glass plate D61 Transparent plate frame D62 Frame stepped portion D63 Transparent plate gap

Claims (1)

a game board provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a guide rail for guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area;
a prevention piece provided near the exit of the guide rail for preventing the game ball that has flowed into the game area from returning into the guide rail;
A main game start opening provided at a predetermined position of the game board and into which a game ball can enter;
A game ball detection device capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the main game start opening;
a base portion;
It is attached to the base part and has a door part that can be opened and closed,
The base portion has a stepped portion which is a front surface of the base portion and is a region higher than the upper surface of the door portion when viewed from the front,
The game ball placed so as to be in contact with the stepped portion is configured so as not to roll forward when viewed from the front,
The power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted when the game ball is shot by the shooting means and the game ball is moving along the guide rail, and the power is turned off when the game ball is moving along the guide rail. When the supply is resumed and the fired game ball passes through the prevention piece and then passes through the game ball detection device via the main game start port, the game ball is detected by the game ball detection device after the power supply is restarted. The time until detection becomes possible is longer than the time from when the launched game ball passes through the prevention piece to when it passes through the game ball detection device via the main game start port. A gaming machine characterized in that

Images